the lighting handbook - unicamp · 2019-09-27 · the ugr method takes account of all the...
TRANSCRIPT
The Lighting Handbook
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:10 Uhr Seite 1
1st edition, July 2004
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 1
Lighting fundamentals
Chapter 2
Recommended values for indoor and outdoor lightingNEW: Based on the new European standards
Chapter 3
Luminaires
Chapter 4
Lamps and ballasts
Chapter 6
Quickplan – Calculating luminaire quantities
Chapter 8
Economic efficiency calculation
Chapter 5
Lighting and room management,Emergency lighting
Chapter 9
Technical information
Chapter 10
Notes
Chapter 7
Lighting refurbishment
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 1
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 5Luminous flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Luminous intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General quality criteria for lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 – 7The right light – traditional and new quality criteria . . 6Illuminance – definition of terminology . . . . . . . . . . . 6 – 7Glare – glare limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Lighting technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 9Light colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Colour rendition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 1
Lighting fundamentals
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 1
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 2
What is light?Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceivedby our eyes.
By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in shadesof grey.
Chapter 1 / 3
What is light? What does the human eye see?
105
100
10-5
10-10
Wavelength [m] Relative spectralbrightness perception
Television, VSW
Visible light
Medium waves
Radio waves
Microwaves
Infrared
Ultraviolet
X-rays
Gamma rays1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
350 450 550Wavelength [nm]
650 750
Wavelength [m]
Night Day
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 3
Luminous fluxThe luminous flux describesthe quantity of light emitted by a light source.The luminous efficiency is the ratio of the luminous flux to the electrical powerconsumed (lm/W).It is a measure of a lamp’s economic efficiency.
4 / Chapter 1
Basic parameters used in lightingLuminous flux – Luminous intensity – Illuminance – Luminance
Luminous flux
Lumen [lm]
Luminance L
[lm/(sr*m2)]=[cd/m2]
Illuminance E
Lux [lm/m2]=[lx]
Luminous intensity I
φ
Candela [lm/sr]=[cd]
I = φΩ
ΩL = EL = IA
E = φA
Abbreviation: φ phiUnit: lm lumen
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 1 / 5
Luminous intensityThe luminous intensitydescribes the quantity of lightthat is radiated in a particulardirection.This is a useful measurementfor directive lighting elementssuch as reflectors. It is repre-sented by the luminous inten-sity distribution curve (LDC).
Abbreviation: ΙUnit: cd candela
IlluminanceIlluminance describes thequantity of luminous flux fallingon a surface. It decreases bythe square of the distance(inverse square law). Relevantstandards specify the requiredilluminance (e.g. EN 12464“Lighting of indoor work-places”).
Illuminance:
E(lx) = luminous flux (lm)area (m2)
Abbreviation: EUnit: lx lux
LuminanceThe luminance is the onlybasic lighting parameter that is perceived by the eye.It specifies the brightness of a surface and is essentiallydependent on its reflectance(finish and colour).
Abbreviation: LUnit: cd/m2
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 1
General quality criteria for lighting The right light – traditional and new quality criteria
NEW
NEW
Quality criteriaQuality criteria
Sufficient illumination level
Appropriate colour rendition
Harmonious brightness distribution
Glare limitation
Avoidance of reflections
Good modelling
Correct light colour
Personal control
Light as an interior design element
Changing lighting situations
Daylight integration
Energy efficiency
TRADITIONAL
TRADITIONAL
Illuminance – definition of terminologyEach term corresponds to the new European standards (see Chapter 2 / 2).
Illuminance maintenance value Em: Value that the illuminancelevel must not fall below in the visual task area.
Visual task area: Illuminance levels are specified for specificvisual tasks and are designed for the area in which these maytake place. If the precise location is not known, then the wholeroom or a specific working area is used to define it. The visualtask area may be a horizontal, vertical or inclined plane.
Area immediately surrounding the visual task area: Here the illuminance may be one level lower than in the visual taskarea (e.g. 300 lx to 500 lx).
Maintenance factor: The initial value multiplied by the mainten-ance factor gives the illuminance maintenance value. The main-tenance factor accounts for the reduction in luminous flux fromlamps, luminaires and room surfaces in the installation, and canbe determined on a case-by-case basis.The maintenance schedule (the cleaning and maintenanceintervals for the lamps and installation) must be documented.See also the chapter on “Economic efficiency calculation”.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 6
effe
ctre
med
y
Chapter 1 / 7
Glare – glare limitationDirect glare Reflected glare
caus
e• luminaires without glare control
• very bright surfaces
• loss of concentration• more frequent mistakes• fatigue
• luminaires with limited luminance levels
• blinds
• reflective surfaces• incorrect luminaire arrangement• incorrect workstation position
• loss of concentration• more frequent mistakes• fatigue
• matching luminaire to workstation (layout)
• indirect lighting• matt surfaces
relative illuminance (%)
operating time
150
125
100
75
50
25
initial value
mainten- ancevalue
Maintenance value = maintenance factor x initial value
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 1
Lighting technologyUnder the new European standard for interior workplace lightingEN 12464, (psychological) glare is assessed by the unified glarerating method (UGR), which is based on a formula for glare.It takes account of all the luminaires in a system contributing to the sensation of glare. UGR tables derived from this formula areprovided by the manufacturers for glare rating.The Quickplan tables in Chapter 6 and the lighting cataloguescontain reference values for specific room sizes.
The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in thesystem that contribute to the glare sensation (2) as well as thebrightness of walls and ceilings (1). It produces a UGR index.
The two methods – the one set out in DIN 5035 and the onedefined in EN 12464 – produce comparable results.
UGR limits (UGRL), that must not be exceeded:
≤ 16 Technical drawing≤ 19 Reading, writing, training, meetings,
computer-based work≤ 22 Craft and light industries≤ 25 Heavy industry≤ 28 Railway platforms, foyers
UGR = 8 log 0,25Lb
L2 P2
(1) (2)( )
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 1 / 9
The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined inDIN 5035 assesses the mean luminance of the luminaires over a beam angle of 45° to 85°. The new European standard sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices, whichis equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx in Qualityclass 1.
85°
75°
65°
55°
45°
A
=
45°
=
85°
a h s
8 6 4 3 2 18
103
104
23
44
56
82
3
Lum
inan
ce L
in c
d/m
2
Qual
ity c
lass
A 1 2 3
1000
2000
750
1500
500
1000
750
<30
050
0<
300
2000
1000
500
<30
020
0010
0050
0<
300
for n
omin
al i
llum
inan
ce (l
x)
UGR L
1316
1922
2528
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 1
Colour rendition
Colour rendition index Ra
Daylight
Incandescent lamp
Sodium vapour high-pressure lamp
≥ 90 80–89 70–79 60–69 40–59 20–39
Compact fluorescent lamp
Fluorescent lamp
Mercury vapour high-pressure lamp
Metal halide lamp
Light colourThe light colour describes the colour appearance of the light.
Colour temperature Appearance Association
ww up to 3,300 K reddish warm
nw 3,300 K – 5,300 K white intermediate
tw above 5,300 K blue-ish cool
The light colour sets the underlying mood of the room!
Application examples:
Ra ≥ 90: colour inspectionRa 80–89: officesRa 70–79: electronics industry
Ra 60–69: assembly workRa 40–59: fabrication shopRa 20–39: warehouses
8 40
Ra ≥ 80
Colour temperature 4,000 K (nw)
Display format on fluorescent lamps
Example 840:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
01_LICHTTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:43 Uhr Seite 10
Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting . . . . . . . 2
Indoor workplacesTraffic zones and general areas inside buildings . . . . 3Industrial activities and crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 7Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Retail premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Places of public assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Educational premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 9Health care premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 10Transportational areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 11Sports facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 – 12
Outdoor workplacesGeneral circulation areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Building sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Canals, locks and harbours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Farms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Fuel filling service stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Industrial sites and storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Off-shore gas and oil structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Parking lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Petrochemical and other hazardous industries . . . . . 14 – 15Power, electricity, gas and heat plants . . . . . . . . . . . 15Railway areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Saw mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Shipyards and docks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Water and sewage plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 2
Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 1
Em gives the illuminance maintenance values specified in theEuropean standards which partially or completely replacenational standards (e.g. DIN 5035, Austrian standard O 1040,Swiss lighting standard SLG 8912, DIN 67526).
“Lighting of indoor workplaces”, EN 12464-1 (April 2003)
“Lighting of outdoorwork places”, pr EN 12464-2
“Sports facility lighting”, EN 12193 (September 1999)
(see also “Definition of terminology”, Chapter 1 / 6)
Illuminance levels must not fall below the Em maintenancevalues in the visual task area. If the precise location is notknown, the limit should be applied to the whole room or aspecific working area.
Example for an office task area:
The maintenance factorscan be determined on a case-by-case basis from the manufacturer’s data (see also Chapter 8).
The maintenance factors and schedules for Zumtobel Staffluminaires are given in the Quickplan tables (Chapter 6).
Where no individual maintenance data is available, the followingvalues are recommended as reference maintenance factors formodern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0.67 in aclean atmosphere, and 0.50 in very dirty environments.
EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must documentthe maintenance factor and maintenance schedule.
UGRL is the upper limit for direct glare. The UGR value calculatedin the design process must lie below this (the Quickplan tablesgive the UGR figure for the luminaire used in a medium-sizereference room).
Ra is the lower limit for the colour rendition index. The Ra of theselected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value.
Standard values for lighting of indoor andoutdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting
height = 0.75 m
taa
task areatask area
user floor-area1.00 m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 2
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildingsTraffic zones• Circulation areas and corridors 100 28 40• Stairs, escalators, travolators 150 25 40• Loading ramps/bays 150 25 40Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms• Canteens, pantries 200 22 80• Rest rooms 100 22 80• Rooms for physical exercise 300 22 80• Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets 200 25 80• Sick bay 500 19 80• Rooms for medical attention 500 16 90Control rooms• Plant rooms, switch gear rooms 200 25 60• Telex, post room, switchboard 500 19 80Store rooms, cold stores• Store and stockrooms 100 25 60• Dispatch packing handling areas 300 25 60Storage rack areas• Gangways: unmanned 20 – 40• Gangways: manned 150 22 60• Control stations 150 22 60
Industrial activities and craftsAgriculture• Loading and operating of goods, handling
equipment and machinery 200 25 80• Buildings for livestock 50 – 40• Sick animal pens; calving stalls 200 25 80• Feed preparation; dairy; utensil washing 200 25 80Bakeries• Preparation and baking 300 22 80• Finishing, glazing, decorating 500 22 80Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks• Drying 50 28 20• Preparation of materials; work on kilns
and mixers 200 28 40• General machine work 300 25 80• Rough forms 300 25 80Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware• Drying 50 28 20• Preparation, general machine work 300 25 80• Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping
simple parts, glazing, glass blowing 300 25 80• Grinding, engraving, glass polishing,
shaping precision parts, manufactureof glass instruments 750 19 80
Chapter 2 / 3
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 2
• Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving 750 16 80
• Precision work e.g. decorative grinding,hand painting 1000 16 90
• Manufacture of synthetic precious stones 1500 16 90Chemical, plastics and rubber industry• Remote-operated processing installations 50 – 20• Processing installations with limited manual
intervention 150 28 40• Constantly manned work places in processing
installations 300 25 80• Precision measuring rooms, laboratories 500 19 80• Pharmaceutical production 500 22 80• Tyre production 500 22 80• Colour inspection 1000 16 90• Cutting, finishing, inspection 750 19 80Electrical industry• Cable and wire manufacture 300 25 80• Winding:
– large coils 300 25 80– medium-sized coils 500 22 80– small coils 750 19 80
• Coil impregnating 300 25 80• Galvanising 300 25 80• Assembly work:
– rough e.g. large transformers 300 25 80– medium e.g. switchboards 500 22 80– fine e.g. telephones 750 19 80– precision e.g. measuring equipment 1000 16 80
• Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting 1500 16 80Food stuffs and luxury food industry• Work places and zones in
– breweries, malting floor– for washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving,
peeling– cooking in preserve and chocolate factories– work places and zones in sugar factories– for drying and fermenting raw tobacco,
fermentation cellar 200 25 80• Sorting and washing of products, milling,
mixing, packing 300 25 80• Work places and critical zones in slaughter
houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filteringfloor in sugar refineries 500 25 80
• Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables 300 25 80• Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen
work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes 500 22 80• Inspection of glasses and bottles, product
control, trimming, sorting, decoration 500 22 80
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 2 / 5
• Laboratories 500 19 80• Colour inspection 1000 16 90Foundries and metal casting• Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc. 50 – 20• Platforms 100 25 40• Sand preparation 200 25 80• Dressing room 200 25 80• Work places at cupola and mixer 200 25 80• Casting bay 200 25 80• Shake out areas 200 25 80• Machine moulding 200 25 80• Hand and core moulding 300 25 80• Die casting 300 25 80• Model building 500 22 80Hairdressers• Hairdressing 500 19 90Jewellery manufacturing• Working with precious stones 1500 16 90• Manufacture of jewellery 1000 16 90• Watch making (manual) 1500 16 80• Watch making (automatic) 500 19 80Laundries and dry cleaning• Goods in, marking and sorting 300 25 80• Washing and dry cleaning 300 25 80• Ironing, pressing 300 25 80• Inspection and repairs 750 19 80Leather and leather goods• Work on vats, barrels, pits 200 25 40• Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins 300 25 80• Saddlery work, shoe manufacture: stitching,
sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching 500 22 80• Sorting 500 22 90• Leather dyeing (machine) 500 22 80• Quality control 1000 19 80• Colour inspection 1000 16 90• Shoe making 500 22 80• Glove making 500 22 80Metal working and processing• Open die forging 200 25 60• Drop forging 300 25 60• Welding 300 25 60• Rough and average machining:
tolerances ≥ 0.1 mm 300 22 60• Precision machining; grinding:
tolerances < 0.1 mm 500 19 60• Scribing; inspection 750 19 60• Wire and pipe drawing shops; cold forming 300 25 60• Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5 mm 200 25 60
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 2
• Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm 300 22 60• Tool making; cutting equipment manufacture 750 19 60• Assembly:
– rough 200 25 80– medium 300 25 80– fine 500 22 80– precision 750 19 80
• Galvanising 300 25 80• Surface preparation and painting 750 25 80• Tool, template and jig making, precision
mechanics, micromechanics 1000 19 80Paper and paper goods• Edge runners, pulp mills 200 25 80• Paper manufacture and processing, paper and
corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture 300 25 80• Standard bookbinding work, e.g. folding, sorting,
gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing 500 22 80Power stations• Fuel supply plant 50 – 20• Boiler house 100 28 40• Machine halls 200 25 80• Side rooms, e.g. pump rooms, condenser
rooms etc.; switchboards (inside buildings) 200 25 60• Control rooms 500 16 80• Outdoor switch gear 20 – 20Printers• Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving,
work on stones and platens, printing machines,matrix making 500 19 80
• Paper sorting and hand printing 500 19 80• Type setting, retouching, lithography 1000 19 80• Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 16 90• Steel and copper engraving 2000 16 80Rolling mills, iron and steel works• Production plants without manual operation 50 – 20• Production plants with occasional manual
operation 150 28 40• Production plants with continuous manual
operation 200 25 80• Slab Store 50 – 20• Furnaces 200 25 20• Mill train; coiler; shear line 300 25 40• Control platforms; control panels 300 22 80• Test, measurement and inspection 500 22 80• Underfloor man-sized tunnels; belt sections;
cellars etc. 50 – 20Textile manufacture and processing• Work places and zones in baths, bale opening 200 25 60
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 2 / 7
• Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work,drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting,pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning 300 22 80
• Spinning, plying, reeling, winding 500 22 80• Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting 500 22 80• Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches 750 22 80• Manual design, drawing patterns 750 22 90• Finishing, dyeing 500 22 80• Drying room 100 28 60• Automatic fabric printing 500 25 80• Burling, picking, trimming 1000 19 80• Colour inspection; fabric control 1000 16 90• Invisible mending 1500 19 90• Hat manufacturing 500 22 80Vehicle construction• Body work and assembly 500 22 80• Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber 750 22 80• Painting: touch-up, inspection 1000 19 90• Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 19 80• Final inspection 1000 19 80Wood working and processing• Automatic processing e.g. drying,
plywood manufacturing 50 28 40• Steam pits 150 28 40• Saw frame 300 25 60• Work at joiner’s bench, gluing, assembly 300 25 80• Polishing, painting, fancy joinery 750 22 80• Work on wood working machines e.g. turning,
fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting,sawing, sinking 500 19 80
• Selection of veneer woods 750 22 90• Marquetry, inlay work 750 22 90• Quality control, inspection 1000 19 90
OfficesOffices• Filing, copying, etc. 300 19 80• Writing, typing, reading, data processing 500 19 80• Technical drawing 750 16 80• CAD work stations 500 19 80• Conference and meeting rooms 500 19 80• Reception desk 300 22 80• Archives 200 25 80
Retail premisesRetail premises• Sales area 300 22 80• Till area 500 19 80• Wrapper table 500 19 80
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 2
Places of public assemblyGeneral areas• Entrance halls 100 22 80• Cloakrooms 200 25 80• Lounges 200 22 80• Ticket offices 300 22 80Restaurants and hotels• Reception/cashier desk, porters desk 300 22 80• Kitchen 500 22 80• Restaurant, dining room, function room – – 80• Self-service restaurant 200 22 80• Buffet 300 22 80• Conference rooms 500 19 80• Corridors 100 25 80Theatres, concert halls, cinemas• Practice rooms, dressing rooms 300 22 80Trade fairs, exhibition halls• General lighting 300 22 80Museums• Exhibits, insensitive to light• Light sensitive exhibitsLibraries• Bookshelves 200 19 80• Reading area 500 19 80• Counters 500 19 80Public car parks (indoor)• In/out ramps (during the day) 300 25 20• In/out ramps (at night) 75 25 20• Traffic lanes 75 25 20• Parking areas 75 – 20• Ticket office 300 19 80
Educational premisesNursery school, play school• Play room 300 19 80• Nursery 300 19 80• Handicraft room 300 19 80Educational buildings• Classrooms, tutorial rooms 300 19 80• Classroom for evening classes and adults
education 500 19 80• Lecture hall 500 19 80• Black board 500 19 80• Demonstration table 500 19 80• Art rooms 500 19 80• Art rooms in art schools 750 19 90• Technical drawing rooms 750 16 80
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 2 / 9
• Practical rooms and laboratories 500 19 80• Handicraft rooms 500 19 80• Teaching workshop 500 19 80• Music practice rooms 300 19 80• Computer practice rooms (menu driven) 300 19 80• Language laboratory 300 19 80• Preparation rooms and workshops 500 22 80• Entrance halls 200 22 80• Circulation areas, corridors 100 25 80• Stairs 150 25 80• Student common rooms and assembly halls 200 22 80• Teachers rooms 300 19 80• Library: bookshelves 200 19 80• Library: reading areas 500 19 80• Stock rooms for teaching materials 100 25 80• Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools
(general use) 300 22 80• School canteens 200 22 80• Kitchen 500 22 80
Health care premisesRooms for general use• Waiting rooms 200 22 80• Corridors: during the day 200 22 80• Corridors: during the night 50 22 80• Day rooms 200 22 80Staff rooms• Staff office 500 19 80• Staff rooms 300 19 80Wards, maternity wards• General lighting 100 19 80• Reading lighting 300 19 80• Simple examinations 300 19 80• Examination and treatment 1000 19 90• Night lighting, observation lighting 5 – 80• Bathrooms and toilets for patients 200 22 80Examination rooms (general)• General lighting 500 19 90• Examination and treatment 1000 19 90Eye examination rooms• General lighting 300 19 80• Examination of the outer eye 1000 – 90• Reading and colour vision tests with vision
charts 500 16 90Ear examination rooms• General lighting 300 19 80• Ear examination 1000 – 90
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 2
Scanner rooms• General lighting 300 19 80• Scanners with image enhancers and television
systems 50 19 80Delivery rooms• General lighting 300 19 80• Examination and treatment 1000 19 80Treatment rooms (general)• Dialysis 500 19 80• Dermatology 500 19 90• Endoscopy rooms 300 19 80• Plaster rooms 500 19 80• Medical baths 300 19 80• Massage and radiotherapy 300 19 80Operating areas• Pre-op and recovery rooms 500 19 90• Operating theatre 1000 19 90• Operating cavityIntensive care unit• General lighting 100 19 90• Simple examinations 300 19 90• Examination and treatment 1000 19 90• Night watch 20 19 90Dentists• General lighting 500 19 90• At the patient 1000 – 90• Operating cavity 5000 – 90• White teeth matching 5000 – 90Laboratories and pharmacies• General lighting 500 19 80• Colour inspection 1000 19 90Decontamination rooms• Sterilisation rooms 300 22 80• Disinfection rooms 300 22 80Autopsy rooms and mortuaries• General lighting 500 19 90• Autopsy table and dissecting table 5000 – 90
Transportational areasAirports• Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim
areas 200 22 80• Connecting areas, escalators, travolators 150 22 80• Information desks, check-in desks 500 19 80• Customs and passport control desks 500 19 80• Waiting areas 200 22 80• Luggage store rooms 200 25 80• Security check areas 300 19 80
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 2 / 11
• Air traffic control tower 500 16 80• Testing and repair hangars 500 22 80• Engine test areas 500 22 80• Measuring areas in hangars 500 22 80Railway installations• Covered platforms and passenger subways
(underpasses) 50 28 40• Ticket hall and concourse 200 28 40• Ticket and luggage offices and counters 300 19 80• Waiting rooms 200 22 80
Sport facilitiesThe following values are based on top level competition and correspond to EN 12193 and EN 12464Ra value of 80 is preferableFor training purposes, a UGRL rating of 19 should bei adhered to• Aerobics 500 60• Archery 200 60• Athletics (all disciplines) 500 60• Badminton 750 60• Basketball 750 60• Billards 750 80• Boccia 300 60• Boules 300 60• Bowling 200 60• Bowls 500 60• Boxing (competition/training) 2000/300 80• Climbing 500 60• Cricket 750 60• Cricket nets 1500 60• Curling (target/playing area) 300/200 60• Cycling 750 60• Dancing (fitness) 500 60• Darts 200 60• Fencing 750 60• Football (indoor) 750 60• Gymnastics 500 60• Handball 750 60• Hockey 750 60• Ice hockey 750 60• Ice skating 750 60• Judo 750 60• Kendo/Karate 750 60• Netball 750 60• Petanque 300 60• Racketball 750 60• Riding 500 60• Roller skating 500 60• School sports 750 60
Type of interior,task or activity Em UGRL Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 2
• Shooting 200 60• Snooker 750 80• Speed skating 500 60• Squash 750 60• Swimming 300 80• Swimmung (school level) 500 60• Table tennis 750 60• Tennis 750 60• Volleyball 750 60• Weight lifting 750 60• Wrestling 750 60
Type of interior,task or activity Em Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 12
General circulation areas• Walkways exclusively for pedestrians 5 20• Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. (10 km/h),
e.g. bicycles, trucks and excavators 10 20• Regular vehicle traffic (max. 40 km/h) 20 20• Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning,
loading and unloading points 50 20
Airports• Hangar apron 20 20• Terminal apron 30 40• Loading areas 50 40• Fuel depot 50 40
Building sites• General lighting at building sites 50 20• Clearance, excavation and loading 20 20• Drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and
storage tasks 50 20• Framework element mounting, light reinforcement
work, wooden mould and framework mounting,electric piping and cabling 100 40
• Element jointing, demanding electrical,machine and pipe mountings 200 40
Canals, locks and harbours• Waiting quays at canals and locks 10 20• Gangways and passages exclusively for pedestrians,
waiting areas 10 20• Outport embankment ballasting at canals and locks 20 20• Lock control area 20 20• Cargo handling, loading and unloading 50 20• Passenger areas in passenger harbours 50 20• Coupling of hoses, pipes and ropes 50 20• Dangerous part of walkways and driveways.
(See also parking areas) 50 20
Farms• Farm yard 20 20• Equipment shed (open) 50 20• Animals sorting pen 50 20
Fuel filling service stations• Vehicle parking and storage areas 5 20• Entry and exit driveways: dark environment 20 20• Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i.e. cities) 50 20• Air pressure and water checking points and
other service areas 150 20• Meter reading area 150 20
Type of area,task or activity Em Ra
Chapter 2 / 13The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 2
Industrial sites and storage areas• Short term handling of large units and raw materials,
loading and unloading of solid bulk goods 20 20• Continuous handling of large units and raw materials,
loading and unloading of freight, lifting and descendinglocation for cranes, open loading platforms 50 20
• Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms,use of tools, ordinary reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants 100 20
• Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection 200 20
Off-shore gas and oil structures• Drill floor and monkey board 300 40• Rotary table 500 40• Pipe rack area/deck 150 40• Derrick 100 40• Mud room, sampling 300 40• Test station, shale shaker, wellhead 200 40Process areas:• Pumping areas 200 20• Crude oil pumps 300 40• Treatment areas 100 40• Ladders, stairs, walkways 100 20• Plant areas 300 40• Boat landing areas/transport areas 100 20• Life boat areas 200 20• Sea surface below the rig 30 20• Helideck 100 20
Parking lots• Light traffic, e.g. parking lots of shops, schools,
churches, terraced and apartment houses 5 20• Medium traffic, e.g. parking lots of department stores,
office buildings, plants, sports and multipurpose building complexes 10 20
• Heavy traffic, e.g. parking lots of major shopping centres,major sports and multipurpose building complexes 20 20
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries• Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated
valves, starting and stopping motors, lighting of burners 20 20• Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons
with risk free substances, inspection of leakage,piping and packing 50 20
• Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances, replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments 100 40
Type of area,task or activity Em Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 14
Chapter 2 / 15
• Repair of machines and electric devices 200 60• Fuel loading and unloading sites 100 20
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants• Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas 5 20• Handling of servicing tools, coal 20 20• Overall inspection 50 20• General servicing work and reading of instruments 100 40• Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance 100 40• Repair of electric devices 200 60
Railway areasPassenger areas:• Open platforms, small stations, rural and local trains 15 40• Open platforms, medium-size stations, suburban and
regional trains 20 40• Open platforms, large stations, inter-city services 50 40• Covered platforms, medium-size stations, suburban
and regional trains 50 40• Covered platforms, large stations, inter-city services 100 40• Stairs, small and medium-size stations 50 40• Stairs, large stations 100 40• Walkways, small and medium-size stations 20 40• Walkways, big stations 50 40Freight areas:• Freight track, short duration operations 10 20• Freight track, continuous operation 20 20• Open platforms 20 40• Covered platform, short duration operations 50 40• Covered platform, continuous operation 100 40• Railway yards handling areas 30 20• Railway yards: flat marshalling, retarder and
classification yards 10 20• Hump areas 10 20• Wagon inspection pit 100 40• Coupling area 50 20• Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 20• Servicing trains and locomotives 20 40• Level crossings 20 20
Saw mills• Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and
chip conveyors 20 20• Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading
points and sawn timber loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor 50 20
• Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber 100 40• Grading and packaging 200 40• Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 300 40
Type of area,task or activity Em Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 2
Extracts from
EN 12464-1EN 12464-2 (draft)EN 12193
by kind permission of the Austrian Norm Institute,A-1020 Viennahttp://www.on-norm.at
Shipyards and docks• Short term handling of large units 20 20• Cleaning of ship hull 50 20• Painting and welding of ship hull 100 60• Mounting of electrical and mechanical components 200 60• General lighting of shipyard area, storage areas
for prefabricated goods 20 40
Water and sewage plants• Handling of service tools, utilisation of manually
operated valves, starting and stopping of motors,piping packing and raking plants 50 20
• Handling of chemicals, inspection of leakage,changing of pumps, general servicing work,reading of instruments 100 40
• Repair of motors and electric devices 200 60
Type of area,task or activity Em Ra
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
02_INNENRAUM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:45 Uhr Seite 16
Chapter 3
Luminaires
Zumtobel Staff applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Types of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 5
X as in XENO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 – 7x-tra strong lighting accents
STARFLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 11Modular fibre-optic system
PANOS L and H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 13Multitalented downlights
PANOS S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14More degrees of vertical freedom
PANOS M/MWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Impressive and powerful
LIGHT FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 – 17Modular micro-pyramidal lighting system
MELLOW LIGHT IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 – 19A piece of sky
MIRAL T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 – 21Surface-mounted louvre luminaire
MIREL T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 – 23Recessed louvre luminaire
MIRAL/MIREL T16 BWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Louvre luminaire for sports halls
AERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 – 26High-tech light with waveguide
OREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Double array (waveguide luminaire)
RTX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 – 29Design-oriented continuous-row lighting system
LED luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 – 31From semiconductor to lighting innovation
FREE-STANDING UPLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 – 33LIGHT FIELDS-S, KAREA, LANOS, FLEXOS
TECTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 – 35Continuous-row lighting system
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 1
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 3 / 3
Office and Education
• Intensifies sense of well-being• Improves human factors• Increases motivation• Creates sense of identity
Health & Care
• Encourages relaxation• Facilitates convalescence• Encourages rehabilitation• Creates feel-good atmosphere
Sport and Leisure
• Facilitates identification• Encourages self discovery• Celebrates surfaces• Stimulates performance
Industry and Engineering
• Provides time reference• Prevents accidents• Reduces stress• Boosts productivity
Art and Culture
• Conveys information• Sets the stage for art• Structures content• Adapts concepts
Hotels and Restaurants
• Creates an unmistakeable look• Paints a backdrop for events• Stimulates sense of well-being• Stimulates communication
Presentation and Retail• Makes objects look attractive• Creates branded landscapes• Gets message across• Shopping becomes an
experience
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 3
Types of lighting
Direct lighting:
– highly directional– strong glare reduction at certain angles– dark ceiling (cave effect)– limited choice of workstation layout– energy-efficient
Indirect lighting:
– diffuse lighting conditions– room gains in height– glare-free– workstations can be positioned anywhere– low energy efficiency
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 3 / 5
Indirect/direct lighting:
– pleasant room impression– high user acceptance– good contrast ratios– flexible workstation layout
(indirect component > 60 %)
Mellow Light:
– indirect/direct solution for low ceiling heights– workstations can be positioned anywhere– glare-free– reduced luminance levels at all viewing angles– gives impression of daylight in room
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 3
XENO QR-CBC covers a hugespectrum of applications thanksto its use of low-voltage halogencool-beam reflector lamps withbeam angles from superspot toflood.
X as in XENO – x-tra strong lighting accents
XENO is a spotlight generationfor professionally setting thelighting stage, providing ideallight for display, accentuationand presentation whether inshops and malls, exhibitionsand trade fairs, or galleriesand museums. The newspotlight-system range,with models ranging from LV halogen lamps to projec-tion spotlights, is comple-mented by a huge choice ofaccessories such as filters,glass covers, lenses, honey-comb louvres or anti-glareblades.
Basically, all spotlights have the following features: they rotate through 365°, the X-joint pivots through 90°. Low-voltagemodels are dimmable via rotarypotentiometer on the spotlight.
XENO QT 12, fitted with theQT 12–100 W low-voltagehalogen lamp, as superspot 8°,spot 15° and flood 40°.
With choice of additional opticalsystems.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 3 / 7
XENO HST: By using high-pres-sure sodium vapour lamps, thespotlight (spot 10°/flood 40°)provides good colour rendition,particularly for warmer colourtones.
XENO HIT-CRI has beenoptimised for HIT-CRI metalhalide lamps with single-endedbase (70 W to 150 W).PulseControl starters monitorlamp parameters and guaranteeoptimum performance.XENO HIT-CRI is available as superspot 10°, spot 15°,flood 35° and superflood 50°.
PROJECTOR: The XENO pro-jection spotlight is a high-performance compact spotlightsystem for accentuation orsharply outlined projection oflogos, gobos or slides. Separatemotor control of slide andcolour magazine allows the useof various patterns and colourfilters.
XENO QR 111 is particularlysuitable for impressive accentlighting. Can be used withQR 111 LV halogen lamps in50 W, 75 W or 100 W versions.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 3
STARFLEX – Modular fibre optic system
System components
QR-CBC 50 W/100 W
Light engine Accessories
HIT 35 W/70 W
HIT 150 W/250 WHIT 150 W/250 W controllable
IP 54 150 W/250 WIP 54 150 W/250 W controllable
Colour-wheel module
Sparkle-effect wheel module
Static colourfilters
Colour tempera-ture correctionfilters
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 3 / 9
Optical fibres Light outlets (selection)
Terminal light emitting glass fibres
Terminal light emitting PMMA fibres
Side-radiating PMMA fibres
Adjustable light outlet
Crystal light outlet
Light outlet for stairway/path lighting
Curved tube light outlet
Projection attachment
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 3
Fibre Properties ApplicationsmaterialGlass – can withstand relatively high – glass display cases in
temperatures (up to 110 °C) museums– extremely long service life – saunas and steam baths
(in excess of 20 years) – hotel and restaurant – relatively tight bending radius lighting– projects preferring
relatively warm light colourPMMA – cheaper than glass – applications requiring
– life time in excess of high levels of 20 years illumination
– projects involving relatively – retail shop windows,cool light colour display shelving and
– choice of side-radiating or show casesterminal light emitting fibres – starry skies in hotels
– side-radiating and terminal and wellness areaslight-emitting fibres can be – outdoor lighting or incombined in a single fibre areas with high air bundle humidity
– fibre bundle can optionallybe assembled on site
Properties and applications of optical fibres
Active Outer diameter Maximum number Minimumdiameter of of sheathing of individual fibres bendingfibre cable per common end radius
spigot1.0 mm 2.2 mm 615 7 mm1.5 mm 2.7 mm 307 11 mm2.0 mm 3.9 mm 176 14 mm3.0 mm 4.9 mm 79 21 mm4.5 mm 6.4 mm 36 32 mm6.0 mm 8.7 mm 20 42 mm
Assembly of glass fibre bundles
Length-dependent correction factors (attenuation) for glass fibre cables
1 m 2 m 3 m 4 m 5 m 6 m 7 m 8 m 9 m 10 m
0.93 0.87 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.66 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.50
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 3 / 11
Active Outer diameter Maximum number Minimumdiameter of of sheathing of individual fibres bendingfibre cable per common end radius
spigot crimped/spliced
1.0 mm 2.2 mm 575/300 8 mm1.5 mm 2.7 mm 342/165 12 mm2.0 mm 4.0 mm 143/70 16 mm3.0 mm 5.0 mm 72/35 24 mm4.5 mm 6.5 mm 37/18 36 mm6.0 mm 8.5 mm 20/10 48 mm8.0 mm 10.5 mm 13/6 60 mm
10.0 mm 12.0 mm 8/4 75 mm
Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (terminal light emission, factory-assembled)
Length-dependent correction factors (attenuation) for PMMA cables1 m 2 m 3 m 4 m 5 m 6 m 7 m 8 m 9 m 10 m
0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.65 0.62
Outer diameter Maximum number of Maximum number of of sheathing individual fibres per individual fibres per
common end spigot common end spigot (crimped) (spliced)
4.5 mm 80 408.0 mm 19 10
11.0 mm 11 514.0 mm 6 3
Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (side radiation, factory-assembled)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 3
PANOS L and H – Multi-talented downlights
PANOS LRecessed depth of just 100 mm.Also suitable for use with VDTworkstations thanks to radiallouvre.
PANOS HSatisfies the most stringent glarelimitation requirements withoutthe need for accessories.
HF/LFThe precision-shaped facetsprovide brilliant effects, reducedluminance levels and optimumefficiency.
HG/LGHighly specular darklight reflectoroptic for glare-free working atthe highest level.
HL/LLThe white reflector optic is aperfect match for the decorativeaccessories.
HWWThe special ribbed structure ofthe reflector produces asymmet-rical light distribution, ideal forhighlighting vertical surfaces.
HM/LMGood looks are guaranteed bythis matt reflector optic withreduced dust sensitivity.
Reflectors and their applications
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 12
Chapter 3 / 13
IP 54 kit, clear glass
IP 54 kit, opal glass
IP 54 kit, structured glass
Akamar
Diameter Wattage Mounting depthPANOS L 175 mm 13–26 W 100 mm
200 mm 18–26 W 100 mm250 mm 26–57 W 100 mm
PANOS H 175 mm 13–26 W 120 mm200 mm 18–42 W 150 mm250 mm 26–57 W 190 mm
Attachments for interior design (selection)
PANOS L and H with compact fluorescent lamps (TC)
Installation instructions
No-tool installationThe mounting ring made of die-cast aluminium is fitted withouttools using spring clips.
Combined reflector/flange unitThe reflector/flange unit is in-stalled by means of a “twist andlock mechanism” without anytools. The ballast box has a rapidlocking device and forms a pre-assembled luminaire unit withthe reflector.
Adhara
Alhena
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 3
PANOS S – More degrees of vertical freedom
The innovative tilting principleallows 45° pivoting into theceiling and up to 60° pivotingout of the ceiling, with horizontalrotation through 360°.A convenient grip clip makespositioning easy.
rotates through 360°
Diameter Lamps Wattage Mounting depth100 mm QT-LP 12 75 W 125 mm
QR-CBC 51 50 W 125 mm150 mm QT-LP 12 100 W 145 mm
HIT 20–70 W 145 mm200 mm QT-LP 12 100 W 230 mm
QR 111 100 W 230 mmHIT 70–150 W 230/240 mmHST 100 W 230 mm
When pivoted at 60°, it can illu-minate the wall from the ceilingdown, or light the top surface ofa shelf. A choice of flood or spotreflectors are available.
With completely independentadjustment of lighting head andhousing possible, PANOS Sworks like a spotlight with anti-glare blades to prevent seeingdirectly into the lamp.
Pivoting into the ceiling at 45°enables asymmetrical lightdistribution for an unobtrusiveand calm ceiling effect.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 14
Chapter 3 / 15
PANOS M/MWW – Impressive and powerful
PANOS MMetal reflector for high thermalstability. Die-cast aluminiummounting rings and coolingattachment. Ideal for lamps with high heat output.
PANOS MTEDust and dirt stand no chanceon the Teflon-coated surface.The high-tech Teflon materialalso results in efficiencies up to10 % higher than conventionalsurface finishes.
PANOS MWWThe sophisticated wallwasherwith asymmetrical light distribu-tion looks just like its rotationallysymmetrical counterparts wheninstalled in the ceiling, ensuringa consistent interior design.
Wide range of lampsPANOS M and MWW canaccommodate a huge range oflamps. For the lighting designer,this means complete freedomwhen professionally setting thelighting stage.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 3
LIGHT FIELDS – Modular micro-pyramidallighting system
Even in surface-mounted and re-cessed luminaires, the sandwichconstruction of the micro-pyramidaloptic ensures both glare control in conformity with standards andreduced luminance for direct illu-mination – ideal for office lightingaccording to standard EN 12464.
Micro-pyramidal optic
Design by Sottsass AssociatiPure innovation for the office
base
micro-pyramidal layerfor directing the light
diffuser layer
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 16
Chapter 3 / 17
Available as recessed/surface-mounted/pendant/free-standing or cluster luminaires, they are ideal forthe more stylish office, with EN 12464 complianceover a range of ceiling heights and floor areas.
Recessed Surface- ID pendant Free-standingmounted luminaire
1198 x 298 1248 x 310 1248 x 310 3/55 W TCL2/28 W T16 2/28 W T16 2/54 W T161498 x 298 1548 x 310 1548 x 310 3/80 W TCL2/35 W T16 2/35 W T16 2/49 W T16598 x 598 623 x 623 623 x 6234/14 W T16 4/14 W T16 4/24 W T161248 x 3102/28 W T161548 x 3102/35 W T16623 x 6234/14 W T16
M 6
00M
625
LIGHT FIELDS model 1-person 2-person 3-personoffice office office
RecessedL-FIELDS E 4 x 4/14 W T16 • •L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 •L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 •L-FIELDS E 6 x 4/14 W T16 •Surface-mountedL-FIELDS A 4 x 4/14 W T16 • •L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 •L-FIELDS A 3 x 2/35 W T16 • •L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 •L-FIELDS A 6 x 4/14 W T16 •
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 17
18 / Chapter 3
MELLOW LIGHT IV – A piece of sky
ReflectorEnclosed lightingchamberLight scattering(opal translucentmaterial)Optic (louvre ordiffuser)
Light scattering (diffuse reflection from surface)ReflectorEnclosed lighting chamberLight scattering (opal translucent material)Colour filter (optional)T16 lampOptic (louvre or diffuser)
T16 lampColour filter (optional)Light scattering (diffuse reflection from surface)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 18
Chapter 3 / 19
MELLOW LIGHT IV recessedluminaire with slotted sheetsteel diffuser optic• Recessed sheet steel housing
with die-cast structure• Lighting chamber made of
high purity PMMA diffuser-pearl material
• Lighting chamber can be back-lit in colour using colour filters
L x B
76
105,6
T16
Diffuser optic
MELLOW LIGHT IV dimensions
• Optic can be fitted withouttools
• Optic has “fly-proof” seal• Diffuser optic with slotted
sheet steel for all-round glare control
• Suitable for glare control onupright and steeply inclineddisplays
• Mounting kit required forconcealed ceiling systemsand sawn cut-outs
• “Dimmable DALI” luminairescontain a DALI-controllableelectronic ballast and aresuitable for all DALI andLuxmate Professionalapplications.
Module 600 Module 625Cat. no. L W H24 W T16 598 598 8128 W T16 1198 298 7635 W T16 1498 298 7649 W T16 1498 298 7654 W T16 1198 298 7655 W TC-L 598 598 81
Cat. no. L W H24 W T16 623 623 8128 W T16 1248 310 7635 W T16 1548 310 7649 W T16 1548 310 7654 W T16 1248 310 7655 W TC-L 623 623 81
Calculating the size of the sawn cut-out in the ceiling:length/width of ceiling cut-out = length/width of luminaire –16 mm
TC-L
81
42
B
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 19
20 / Chapter 3
Complete louvre luminaire range:– surface-mounted luminaire– indirect/direct pendant luminaire– wallwasher
Application: offices, schools, shops
Benefits: – BIVERGENZ® plus lighting technology– quick installation thanks to
– mounting bracket– pre-fitted lamp– protective film
Lay in Fold up Snap in
MIRAL T16 – Surface-mounted louvre luminaire
Light source includedMIRAL T16 is pre-fitted with an LF840 lamp (LF830 availableon request). This keeps theinstallation effort to a minimum,saving the time, resources andenergy that would otherwise bespent on lamp procurement,transport and temporary storage.
PackagingThe mounting brackets arelocated ready for use outside the box so there is no need toopen it. Advantage: the luminaireremains protected in its pack-aging during pre-installation.The installation instructions anddrilling template are printed onthe outside of the box.
Electrical connectionQuick installation is alsoguaranteed thanks to the exactlycentered 5-pole plug-in terminal(CE-compliant) easily accessiblefrom outside the luminaire.Thus the connecting cable canbe fitted conveniently and inminimum time without needingto open the luminaire housing.
Protective filmA special self-adhesive pro-tective film made of recyclablematerial offers optimum pro-tection against louvre soiling.MIRAL T16 can therefore befully installed whilst buildingwork is still in progress, andeven used to light the construc-tion site. Once the building isfinished, simply pull away thefilm which leaves no residue.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 20
Chapter 3 / 21
Traditional installation for the electricianmeant four trips up and down theladder, two operations with the electric screwdriver.
MIRAL T16 installation for the electri-cian means getting the same result inhalf the time!
Traditional installation
MIRAL T16installation
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 21
22 / Chapter 3
Complete louvre luminaire range:– narrow recessed luminaire– recessed luminaire module– wallwasher
Application: offices
Benefits: – BIVERGENZ® plus lightingtechnology
– ergonomic installation– pre-fitted lamp– Balanced Colour
The secret of success of Zumtobel Staff’s louvre luminaire is:ONE (BIVERGENZ® technology) plus ONE (UniQue blade) = FOUR (benefits)
MIREL T16 – Recessed louvre luminaire
The patented BIVERGENZ®
technology, based on 25 yearsof experience, has two newfeatures developed specificallywith the new European standardEN 12464 in mind: a higher-reflection coating in the latestmaterials, and the innovativefreeform surface technology ofthe UniQue blade.
BIVERGENZ® plus
This provides FOUR benefits:
– Optimum uniformity thanks to practically ideal batwing distribution of direct light
– Gentle all-round glare control in conformity with the new EN 12464 standard
– Standard narrow-width louvre for fitting one or two lamps
– Maximum efficiency thanks to louvre material increasing reflection
Convergence
Divergence
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 22
Chapter 3 / 23
MIREL T16 in continuous-rowlighting systemStraightforward installation of a continuous row system withclean, visually unbroken lines in the narrow louvre design.
Emergency lightingcomponentsPower failure? No problemthanks to optional emergencylighting components!
Electrical connectionOptionally available with Euro,T12 or Wieland connectors,built-in or with cable.
Integrated light sourceOption of complete luminairewith pre-fitted lamp for straight-forward, fast installation: unpack
the luminaire, fit, remove pro-tective film, and it’s done!
Air extraction openingsThrough special openings in thestandard luminaire housing,used air from the room flowsdirectly into the ventilated ceiling.Extensive measurement data isavailable to assist accurate air-handling calculations.
Lighting control systemRequirements for lightingintensity and lighting scene vary:optional LUXMATE lightingcontrol components can be usedfor easy control of MIREL T16luminaires and dynamic lightchanges.
Solutions
Louvre luminaire range:– Surface-mounted luminaire
BWS T16– Recessed luminaire BWS T16– Trunking installation
accessories
Application: sports halls
MIRAL/MIREL T16 BWS – Louvre luminaire for sports halls
Benefits:– High luminous efficiency thanks
to T16 lamp– Narrow housing thanks to
2-in-1 lamp capability (twolamps in one louvre panel)
– Good price/performance ratio
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 23
24 / Chapter 3
Light distribution
AERO – High-tech light with waveguide
Principle of operation
Directional light emission in batwing distribution
560 cd/m2 at 60°
3800 cd/m2 at 30°2900 cd/m2 at 0°
Reduced luminance levels
Operating efficiencyη = 70 % (2/54W)
I : D = 75 % : 25 %
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 24
Chapter 3 / 25
AERO waveguide luminaireModels and designs
2 x 54 W T5–16 mm
2 x 28 W T5–16 mm
Geometric
Softline
Softline semi-transparent
Features Effect Application
Reduced No direct or Offices with modern luminance levels reflected glare office equipment
(standard screens,flat-panel displays,VDTs)
Lamps cannot be Restricted brightness Flat-panel displays, e.g.seen from any angle in doctors’ surgeries
Indirect/direct Ceiling pleasantly Ceiling heights of ratio 75:25 illuminated, good 2.50 m or more,
modelling, good flexible workstation contrast rendition layout
Light directed using Louvre-like Rooms with longer microprismatic directional maintenancearrays light distribution, intervals
easy to clean
Features and typical applications
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 25
26 / Chapter 3
AERO with SLC® technology
Principle of operation (SLC® lateral light coupler)See OREA luminaire
– See OREA luminaire for description of lighting technology
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 26
Chapter 3 / 27
OREA – Double array (waveguide luminaire)
– directional direct-lightcomponent with reducedluminance of toL ≤ 2,500 cd/m2 at 65°for standard situations
– luminaires can be arrangedfreely in the room, includingdirectly above workstations(except where flat-paneldisplays are used)
– direct component approxi-mately 5 % higher thanAERO
Principle of operation (SLC® lateral light coupler)
OGZ-ID 2/54
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:46 Uhr Seite 27
28 / Chapter 3
RTX II – Design-oriented continuous row lighting system
Individual luminaires and continuous row systems:– Pure aluminium– Matt bivergent or darklight
reflector optic– Wallwasher for illuminating
blackboards– Decorative optics
Design by Charles KellerAvant-garde in terms of bothmaterial and shape
Application: offices and schools
Typical applications
RTX II-D1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W
Day schoolTechnical college/evening schoolOfficeOffice with DSEOpen-plan officeTechnical drawing
RTX II-C1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W
Day schoolTechnical college/evening schoolOfficeOffice with DSEOpen-plan officeTechnical drawing
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 28
Chapter 3 / 29
300 Lux (Day school)
RTX II 1 x 49 WRTX II 1 x 54 WRTX II 1 x 80 W
RTX II 2 x 28 WRTX II 2 x 35 WRTX II 2 x 49 WRTX II 2 x 54 W
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40
blackboard –luminaire distance [m]
optimum range
possible range undercertain conditions*
possible range
* Use strongly depends on architectural parameters andluminaire arrangement.
500 Lux (Evening schooland technical colleges)
RTX II 1 x 80 W
RTX II 2 x 49 WRTX II 2 x 54 W
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40
blackboard –luminaire distance [m]
optimum range
possible range undercertain conditions*
possible range
* Use strongly depends on architectural parameters andluminaire arrangement.
RTX II Wallwasher
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 29
LEDOS M
LEDOS B
KAVA LED
LEDOS RG LEDOS RGB
PHAOS Lighting tube
PHAOS LED lighting tile
PHAOS Spotlight PHAOS Line
30 / Chapter 3
Static and dynamic light
LED luminaires – From semiconductor to lighting innovation
Overview of LED luminaires
static dynamic
Benefits of LED technology
– long service life = low maintenance costs– low power consumption = minimum operating costs– vibration and impact-proof– compact size– high colour stability– efficient control thanks to simple control system– low heat generation
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 30
Chapter 3 / 31
stat
icdy
nam
icPH
AOS
PHAO
SPH
AOS
PHAO
SNa
me
LEDO
S M
LEDO
S B
KAVA
LED
LEDO
S RG
LEDO
S RG
BLi
ghtin
g til
eLig
htin
g tu
beSp
otlig
htLi
ne*
Colo
urs
Blue
Blue
Blue
Alte
rnat
ely
Full
Full
Full
Full
Full
Yello
wYe
llow
Yello
wre
d/gr
een
spec
trum
spec
trum
spec
trum
spec
trum
spec
trum
Gree
nGr
een
Gree
nRe
dRe
dRe
dW
hite
Whi
teW
hite
Diam
eter
of
6585
/100
/120
120
120
circ
ular
lum
inai
res
Dim
ensi
ons
of
80 x
80
85 x
85
100
x 10
012
0 x
120
120
x 12
022
8 x
228
310
310
x 10
0sq
uare
80 x
115
100
x 10
090
090
0 x
100
lum
inai
res
120
x 12
0IP
67/6
854
/67
20/5
467
6720
2020
67Vo
ltage
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
230
V24
V24
V23
0 V
230
V23
0 V
230
V*
only
avai
labl
e as
ana
log
vers
ion
Tech
nica
l dat
a (s
elec
tion)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 31
32 / Chapter 3
FREE-STANDING UPLIGHTS – LIGHT FIELDS-S, KAREA, LANOS, FLEXOS
Free-standing uplights …
… enable personal adjustmentand control to suit viewing condi-tions and the visual task in hand;
… allow individual illuminationof the workstation;
… can be placed in theoptimum position, making thewhole office space useable;
… can be adjusted easily andeconomically to evolving officesituations;
… use sensors to provideoptimum user convenience andlarge potential energy savings.
LIGHT FIELDS-S
• Free-standing uplight withindirect/direct light distribution
• 3/55 W or 3/80 W TC-L • Direct light component with
micro-pyramidal optic (MPO)with defined glare-free lightemission L < 1000 cd/m2 at60°/65°
• Luminaire head and standmade of anodised aluminium
• SensControl LCD with built-indisplay for intuitive operation
KAREA
• Free-standing luminaire withindirect/direct light distribution4/55 W TC-L
• Extremely flat angularluminaire head
• Direct light component withperforated metal optic
• Angular aluminium stand• Optionally available with
SensControl lightingmanagement system
• SensControl LCD with built-indisplay for intuitive operation
• Colour: titanium
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 32
Chapter 3 / 33
SensControl LCD
SensControl LCD is the highlyconvenient SensControl lightingmanagement system for LIGHTFIELDS-S, LANOS, FLEXOS andKAREA uplights.The main feature is a smallLCD display which providesdetails of the various operatingstates and settings.
Straightforward menu-drivensoftware allows near-intuitivecontrol of the luminaire and easyprogramming of individualfunctions.Besides individual adjustment ofthe daylight sensor and presencedetector, SensControl LCD alsomakes it possible to call up pre-set profiles, program switch-ontimes or select the menu languagedesired at the press of a button.This innovative electronic systemcombines intelligent technologywith optimum operatingconvenience.
LANOS
• Free-standing luminaire withindirect/direct light distribution4/55 W TC-L
• Luminaire head with lateralperforated metal refractors
• Stand made of aluminiumextrusion
• Two-step switching(50/100 %)
• Optionally available withSensControl lightingmanagement system
• SensControl LCD with built-indisplay for intuitive operation
• Colour: titanium
FLEXOS
• Free-standing luminaire withindirect/direct light distribu-tion, with 1 to 4 heads
• Direct light component withlouvre optic or perforatedmetal optic
• 2/55 W TC-L per head• Optimum two-point adjust-
ment of each luminaire headin relation to workstation
• Optionally available withSensControl lightingmanagement system
• Single- and twin-head versiondimmable via touch switch
• Colour: titanium
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 33
34 / Chapter 3
TECTON – continuous-row lighting system
TECTON Compact
TECTON Retail
TECTON-I Industry
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 34
Chapter 3 / 35
TECTON provides flexibility
Layout changes occur at ever shorter intervals in retail,business and industry, demanding maximum flexibility from anycontinuous-row lighting system. TECTON allows the luminairemodules to be placed anywhere on the trunking. Technicalalterations to the lighting can also be made on site, with 11-polewiring allowing any modifications in terms of brightness controlor emergency lighting supply in conformity with relevantstandards.
TECTON saves on installation costs
“The easier, the better”. The specially designed power conductorintegrated in the trunking revolutionises installation, makingTECTON both versatile and easy to handle. Not only does thissave time, but lower qualified and hence cheaper staff can dothe work. All components can be combined logically and simplyin the modular system, reducing TECTON installation costs by up to 60 percent through time savings, depending on thecontinuous row configuration chosen.
TECTON provides safety
TECTON provides safety in several ways:
– At the design stage, by the integration of mains lighting,emergency lighting and control;
– By the clear separation of emergency and escape-signluminaires in two emergency-lighting circuits;
– By the ONLITE emergency luminaire range that can be fullycustomized to the TECTON system for safety and reliability ofthe lighting solution in conformity with relevant standards.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
03_LEUCHTEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:47 Uhr Seite 35
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
Lamp selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Lamp characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3The main lamp types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 8Application notes, T16 fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 10A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 . . . . . . 11Application notes, compact fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . 12 – 13Application notes, metal halide lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 + 400 W . . 15 – 16Lamp names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Comparison of lamp names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Characteristic values of the major lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 18 – 22Energy efficiency of luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Properties of dimmable electronic ballasts . . . . . . . . . 24Power consumption, energy savings, required power . . 25
Chapter 4
Lamps and ballasts
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 1
Choosing the right lamp –
An important first decision
Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of thelighting (see Chapter 5 / 2).
For instance, incandescent lamps are still the most popularlighting option used in domestic areas to help create that cosyatmosphere. Even though the lamps may generate little light, thepoor efficiency is acceptable because they are comparativelycheap to buy and are normally on for short periods.
In other situations, users happily tolerate the higher purchaseprice of discharge lamps because their high luminous efficiencyand long lifetime make them economic.
Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find the most suitable lamp for a lighting task.
Lamp characteristics can essentially be specified by thefollowing key terms:
Lampcharacter-
istics
Luminousflux/
efficiency
Lamppower
Servicelife
Lightcolour
Colourrendition
Warm-uptime
Re-starttime
Dimmingcapability
Burningposition
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 4 / 3
Lamp characteristics
1. Power The electrical power consumption of the lamp asopposed to the power consumption of a system comprisinglamp and ballast.2. Luminous flux/luminous efficiency The luminous fluxspecifies the total amount of light generated by a lamp. Therated luminous flux is measured at a standardised measurementtemperature of 25 °C in units of lumen [lm]. The ratio of lumi-nous flux to electrical power consumption gives the luminousefficiency [lm/W]. The system luminous efficiency also includesthe power consumption of the ballast.3. Service life The average service life is normally specified,being the time by which statistically half the lamps are stillworking (mortality). The drop in luminous flux also needs to betaken into account.4. Light colour The light colour describes the colour impressionmade by a white light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) orrelatively cool (nw = intermediate, tw = cool). It is affected bythe red and blue colour components in the spectrum.5. Colour rendition The spectral components of the light de-termine how well various object colours can be reproduced. Thehigher the colour rendition index (Ra or CRI), or the lower thecolour rendition group number, the better the colour rendition incomparison with the optimum reference light.6. Warm-up time Discharge lamps in particular need between30 seconds and several minutes to warm up and output the fullluminous flux.7. Re-start High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool downfor several minutes before they can be started again.8. Dimming capability Besides incandescent and halogenincandescent lamps, nowadays all fluorescent and compactfluorescent lamps can also be dimmed over almost any range.Metal halide lamps, however, are still not approved by the manu-facturers for dimming, because this may have uncontrollableeffects on light quality and lamp service life. The power of high-pressure sodium- and mercury-vapour lamps can be varied, butonly in discrete levels.9. Burning position Manufacturers specify the permittedburning positions for their lamps. For some metal halide lamps,only certain burning positions are allowed so as to avoid un-stable operating states. Compact fluorescent lamps may usuallybe used in any burning position, although important propertiessuch as the luminous flux vs. temperature curve may vary withposition.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 4
The main lamp types
Ha
lo
ge
n
la
mp
s
Halogen lamps• For mains and low-voltage
operation• Longer service life and
higher luminous efficiency than incandescent lamps
• Easy to dim
• Brilliant light• Excellent colour rendition• Applications: retail
and domestic areas,restaurants and catering
How they work Current flows through a filament andheats it up, just as in incandescent lamps. These lampstherefore generate a relatively large amount of heat. Thehalogen cycle increases the efficiency and extends theservice life compared with traditional incandescent lamps.Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precisedirection of light, but do require a transformer.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 4 / 5
Fl
uo
re
sc
en
t
la
mp
s
Fluorescent lamps• High to very high lumi-
nous efficiency (inparticular T16 HE)
• Good to excellent colour rendition
• Long service life• Extensive range of types• Dimmable
How they work An alternating electric field generatesinvisible UV radiation between the two electrodes in thedischarge tube. This radiation is converted into high-qualityvisible light in the fluorescent material. The lamps need astarting aid and a current limiting device, usually combinedin an electronic ballast. The luminous flux is highly depend-ent on the ambient temperature.
Co
mp
ac
t
fl
uo
re
sc
en
t
la
mp
s
Compact fluorescentlamps• Compact designs• High luminous efficiency• Excellent colour rendition• Extensive range of types
• Dimmable• Applications: commer-
cial and high-profileinteriors, restaurantsand catering
How they work These lamps are compact versions of thelinear or circular fluorescent lamps, and operate in a verysimilar way. The luminous flux depends on the burningposition and temperature.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 4
Me
ta
l h
ali
de
la
mp
s
Metal halide lamps• High luminous efficiency• Good to excellent colour
rendition• High colour stability for cer-
amic discharge-tube lamps
How they work In metal halide lamps, a highly compactelectric arc is produced in a discharge tube. The com-position of the materials in the tube determines the lightquality. A starter is needed to switch on the lamp, and thecurrent must be limited by a ballast. Practical electronicballasts are also available for low-power lamps.The use of ceramic discharge tubes further improves thelamp properties.
• Cannot be dimmed• Applications: industrial
bays, spotlighting,floodlighting, retailareas
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 4 / 7
Me
rc
ur
y v
ap
ou
r l
am
ps
Mercury vapour lamps• No starter, just ballast
required• Satisfactory to poor
colour rendition• Can be dimmed in
discrete steps• Applications: indus-
trial bays, streetlighting
So
di
um
v
ap
ou
r
la
mp
s
Colour-improved (Philips SDW):• Excellent colour rendition• Warm light• Long service life• Application: retail
areas
How they work The discharge in the linearly extendedceramic discharge tube is defined by sodium, so the lightis yellowish and only suitable for special applications. Thecolour-improved SDW lamp by Philips is a popular choicefor lighting retail areas. A starter is usually needed toswitch on the lamp, and the current must be limited by a ballast.
How they work The high-pressure mercury vapour lampis actually the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp,although it provides a far poorer light quality. The lampscan be started at mains voltage, and so only need aballast for current limiting.
Sodium vapour lamps• High luminous efficiency and
long service life• Satisfactory to poor colour
rendition
• Can be dimmed indiscrete steps
• Applications: indus-trial bays, streetlighting
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 4
In
du
ct
io
n
la
mp
s
How they work A high-frequency electromagnetic field iscoupled into the glass bulb via an antenna protruding intothe bulb. This produces UV radiation which is then con-verted into visible light by fluorescent material, just as in fluorescent lamps. The amalgam technology used inthese lamps makes their luminous flux only very slightlytemperature-dependent. The lamps can only be operatedwith special electronic ballasts. Systems have a very longservice life because the only parts subject to wear are inthese ballasts. As yet there are no dimmable electronicballasts available.
QL• 55 W, 85 W and 165 W• Rotationally symmetrical light
distribution• Applications: areas where
it is difficult to replace
lamps; commercialand industrialinteriors, retail,indoor and outdoorpublic areas
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 4 / 9
Application notesT16 fluorescent lamps
T16 lamps differ from T26 versions in several characteristicsthat the user should be particularly aware of.
1. Luminous flux – temperature curve
As for all fluorescent lamps, the lamp’s luminous flux istemperature-dependent. The maximum value is obtained at anoptimum ambient temperature, with losses increasing at higherand lower temperatures. The T16 basically follows the samecurve as the T26, but the maximum occurs not at an ambienttemperature of 20 to 25 °C but at about 35 °C. The reason forthis is that the cool spot of the T16 lamp does not lie in thecentre of the lamp but typically at one end of the tube near thelamp end.The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambienttemperature of 25 °C. For the T16, the maximum value there-fore lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies mayhave levels greater than “1”.
%
100
80
60
40
20
T26 58 W
T16
T26 36 W
-20 0 20
Ambient temperature40 60 80 °C
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 9
3. Ageing/burning in
Brand new lamps stabilise during the ageing phase. This is theperiod immediately after the lamps are switched on for the firsttime, when the initially encapsulated mercury is vaporised andevenly distributed in the lamp. To ensure perfect operation, oneshould allow a period of 2 to 4 days of operation withoutdimming or switching, particularly in dimming installations.Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and light colour,even exhibiting flickering at low dimming levels. One should also wait for proper ageing before assessing the illuminancelevel and the light quality. This ageing has no effect on the lamp service life.
2. Lamp orientation
Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being identical indesign, it matters how one or more lamps are fitted in theluminaires. In general, lamp ends should always have the sameorientation i.e. in multi-lamp luminaires they should lie next toeach other, and where lamps are positioned vertically, theyshould preferably also be at the bottom. For cool environments it may be practical to choose a different orientation.
normalambienttemperature
cool ambienttemperature
single-lamp multi-lamp
10 / Chapter 4 The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 4 / 11
A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26
Advantages of T16 fluorescent lamps
– Reduction in the lamp diameter by about 40 %– Higher optical efficiencies possible– Improved luminous efficiency– Improved luminaire efficiencies from the shift in the
luminous-flux peak– Standardised luminance levels for all lamp lengths for
high-efficiency lamps– Larger range of types makes it easier to meet lighting
requirements more closely
Summary type comparison (selection):
T16 T26Length Power Rated lumi- Length Power Rated lumi-
nous flux (25°) nous flux (25°)549 mm 14 W 1200 lm 590 mm 18 W 1350 lm
24 W 1750 lm849 mm 21 W 1900 lm 895 mm 30 W 2350 lm
39 W 3100 lm1149 mm 28 W 2600 lm 1200 mm 36 W 3350 lm
54 W 4450 lm1449 mm 35 W 3300 lm 1500 mm 58 W 5200 lm
49 W 4300 lm80 W 6150 lm
Example of interior lighting using T16 and T26
Room dimensions: length = 8 m, width = 6 m, height = 3 mReflection factors: ceiling = 70 %, walls = 50 %, floor = 20 %Required maintenance value of illuminance: 500 lxOption 1: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/36 W electr. ballastOption 2: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/28 W electr. ballast
Option 1 Option 22/36 W 2/28 W
Number of luminaires 8 8Max. lamp luminous efficiency 93 lm/W 104 lm/WPower consumption per m2 per 100 lx 2.2 W/m2/100 lx 2.0 W/m2/100 lxLuminaire efficiency 85 % 91 %Utilization factor 66 % 73 %Energy saving 10 %
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 4
Application notesCompact fluorescent lamps
1. Amalgam lamps
The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux oftraditional fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can becompensated by adding amalgam (mercury compound).This helps to somewhat check the steep drop-off at higher orlower temperatures, so that at least 90 % of the maximumluminous flux is achieved over a wide temperature range ofabout +5 to +70 °C. Above and below this range, however, thelight level still falls off sharply. The tables provide an overview
of those majormanufacturers’lamps in the TC-Tdesign (three-folddouble tube) thathave addedamalgam.
with amalgam TC-TI, TC-TELI, TC-QELI
13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W
Osram 2-pinDULUX T X X X
Osram 4-pinDULUX T/E X X X X X
GE 2-pinBIAX T X X X
Sylvania 2-pinLynx CF-T X X
without amalgam TC-T, TC-TE
13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W 60 W 70 W 85 W 120 W
Osram2-pinDULUX T IN X X
Osram4-pinDULUX T/E IN X X X X X X
Philips2-pinPL-T 2p X X
Philips4-pinPL-T 4p X X X X X X X
GE4-pinBIAX T/E X X X XBIAX Q/E X X X
Sylvania 4-pinLynx CF-TE X X X X
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 12
Chapter 4 / 13
2. Lamp orientation
The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highlydependent on the burning position. The light output ratio cantherefore be maximized by inserting the lamps correctly.Standard types have a cool spot in the exposed lamp bend, sothat self-heating and convection may lead to a temperature risehere. In amalgam lamps, the cool spot lies in the lamp base.In compact luminaires with horizontal lamp arrangement (e.g. downlights), it is therefore recommended to fit the lampswith electrodes uppermost wherever possible. Since the lampend does not allow consistent identification of the electrodeposition, that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are notconnected should be placed uppermost – these are the twotube ends containing the internal electrodes. The exception tothis is the PHILIPS PL-T, in which the electrodes are arrangeddiagonally. Either possible orientation of these lamps is equivalent.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 4
Application notesMetal halide lamps
1. Ballasts
The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range of opera-ting principles, resulting in different electrical operating values.Some lamps are therefore approved for operation both withballasts for metal halide lamps (e.g. COPA I 1/400 HIE) and withballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps (e.g. COPA I1/400 HSE). The higher operating current then leads to higherluminous flux levels for the same lamps together with a slightlyaltered light quality. In both cases suitable starters are required.
2. Glass covers
In general, metal halide lamps require a glass cover to protectpeople and property in the event of the lamp exploding.It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to decide whether topermit individual lamp types to be used in uncovered luminaires.Suitable safety devices are installed in the lamps for thispurpose (e.g. integral safety tube, outer protective coating).The detailed information from the manufacturer must beobserved without fail.
3. Service life characteristics
The average lamp service life (lamp survival factor) and the re-duction in luminous flux (lamp luminous flux maintenance factor)can vary markedly in some of the different lamp types. They alsodepend on the switching frequency and the position of use.Once again the detailed data from the manufacturer must betaken into account. The maintenance factor tables in Chapter 8contain some typical values.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 14
Chapter 4 / 15
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 WOS
RAM
PHIL
IPS
HQI-E
HQ
I-E/P
HQI-T
HP
I-PLU
SHP
I-PLU
SHP
I-T P
LUS
250
W/D
250
W/D
250
W/D
250
W-B
U25
0 W
BU-
P25
0 W
Desi
gnEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idTu
beEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idTu
beBa
seE4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0Bu
rnin
g po
sitio
nan
yan
yan
yve
rtica
l ±15
°ve
rtica
l ±15
°ho
rizon
tal ±
20°
Appr
oved
for o
pera
tion
in
noye
sno
noye
sno
unco
vere
d lu
min
aire
sAv
erag
e se
rvic
e lif
e12
,000
h12
,000
h12
,000
h20
,000
h20
,000
h20
,000
hRe
duct
ion
in lu
min
ous
flux
See
mai
nten
ance
fact
ors
in C
hapt
er 8
“Ca
lcul
atio
n of
eco
nom
ic e
ffici
ency
”
Oper
atio
n w
ith m
etal
-hal
ide
lam
p ba
llast
(HI)
Lum
inou
s flu
xno
t per
mitt
edno
t per
mitt
edno
t per
mitt
ed19
,000
lm19
,000
lm19
,000
lmCo
lour
tem
pera
ture
4,30
0 K
4,30
0 K
4,50
0 K
Colo
ur re
nditi
on in
dex
R a69
6965
Oper
atio
n w
ith h
igh-
pres
sure
sod
ium
-vap
our l
amp
balla
st (H
S)Lu
min
ous
flux
19,0
00 lm
17,0
00 lm
20,0
00 lm
25,5
00 lm
25,5
00 lm
23,0
00 lm
Colo
ur te
mpe
ratu
re5,
200
K6,
000
K5,
300
K3,
800
K3,
800
K4,
000
KCo
lour
rend
ition
inde
x R a
9090
9069
6965
All d
ata
subj
ect t
o ch
ange
.For
relia
ble
info
rmat
ion
and
data
on
othe
r lam
p ty
pes,
plea
se re
fer t
o th
e m
anuf
actu
rer’s
dat
a.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 4
OSRA
MPH
ILIP
S
HQI-E
HQ
I-E/P
HQI-E
HQI-E
HQ
I-BT
HQI-T
HPI-P
LUS
HPI-P
LUS
HPI P
LUS
HPI-T
PLU
S40
0 W
/D40
0 W
/D40
0 W
/N40
0 W
/N40
0 W
/D40
0 W
/N40
0 W
-40
0 W
400
W40
0 W
clea
rBU
BU-P
Desi
gnEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idTu
beTu
beEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idEl
lipso
idTu
beBa
seE4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0E4
0Bu
rnin
g po
sitio
nan
yan
yan
yan
yan
yho
rizon
tal
verti
cal
verti
cal
horiz
onta
l ho
rizon
tal
±45
°±
15°
±15
°±
20°
±20
°Ap
prov
ed fo
r ope
ratio
n in
no
yes
nono
nono
noye
sno
noun
cove
red
lum
inai
res
Aver
age
serv
ice
life
12,0
00 h
12,0
00 h
12,0
00 h
12,0
00 h
12,0
00 h
12,0
00 h
20,0
00 h
20,0
00 h
20,0
00 h
20,0
00 h
Redu
ctio
n in
lum
inou
s flu
xSe
e m
aint
enan
ce fa
ctor
s in
Cha
pter
8 “
Calc
ulat
ion
of e
cono
mic
effi
cien
cy”
Oper
atio
n w
ith m
etal
-hal
ide
lam
p ba
llast
(HI)
Lum
inou
s flu
x26
,000
lm23
,000
lm34
,000
lm36
,000
lm25
,000
lm34
,000
lm35
,000
lm35
,000
lm30
,000
lm35
,000
lmCo
lour
tem
pera
ture
5,80
0 K
5,00
0 K
3,60
0 K
3,60
0 K
6,10
0 K
3,80
0 K
4,30
0 K
4,30
0 K
4,70
0 K
4,30
0 K
Colo
ur re
nditi
on in
dex
R a90
9065
6590
6569
6969
65
Oper
atio
n w
ith h
igh-
pres
sure
sod
ium
-vap
our l
amp
balla
st (H
S)Lu
min
ous
flux
30,0
00 lm
27,0
00 lm
43,0
00 lm
45,0
00 lm
32,0
00 lm
42,0
00 lm
42,5
00 lm
42,5
00 lm
35,0
00 lm
38,0
00 lm
Colo
ur te
mpe
ratu
re5,
900
K4,
500
K4,
000
K4,
000
K5,
200
K3,
700
K3,
800
K3,
800
K3,
800
K4,
000
KCo
lour
rend
ition
inde
x R a
9090
7070
9065
6969
6965
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 400 W
All d
ata
subj
ect t
o ch
ange
.For
relia
ble
info
rmat
ion
and
data
on
othe
r lam
p ty
pes,
plea
se re
fer t
o th
e m
anuf
actu
rer’s
dat
a.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 16
Chapter 4 / 17
Lamp names as given by the LIS (ZVEI) – a selection
Abbreviation Description
A General-purpose incandescent lampsR Reflector lampsQT 18 Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage Ø 18 mmQT 32 Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage Ø 32 mmQT-DE Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage, linear double-
endedQ PAR Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage with reflector
QT9 Low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps Ø 9 mmQT12 Low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps Ø 12 mmQR Low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps with reflectorQR-CB Low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps with cool-light
specular reflectorQR-CBC Low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps with cool-light
specular reflector and glass cover
T16 Fluorescent lamps Ø 16 mmT26 Fluorescent lamps Ø 26 mmTC-S/SEL Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) up to 11 W/for electr. ballastTC-D/DEL Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes) up to 26 W/for electr. ballastTC-T/TEL Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) up to 42 W/for electr. ballastTC-L Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) up to 80 WTC-TELI/ Compact fluorescent lamps (3–4 tubes) amalgam technology QELI up to 120 W/only for electronic ballast
HI Metal halide lamps: various designsHM High-pressure mercury vapour lamps: ellipsoidHS High-pressure sodium vapour lamps: various designs LS Low-pressure sodium vapour lamps: tubular
Comparison of lamp names (examples)
Internat. Manufacturer namesname fromLIS (ZVEI) Osram Philips GE Sylvania
A 60 A A A1 NormalQR-CBC DECOSTAR S Masterline Precise MR SuperiaQPAR HALOPAR PAR PAR Hi-SpotTC-S DULUX S PL-S BIAX S Lynx CF-STC-T DULUX T PL-T BIAX T Lynx CF-TTC-L DULUX L PL-L BIAX L Lynx CF-LT16 FH, FQ TL5 HE, HO F T5T26 L TLD F FHME HQL HPL H HSLHIT HQI-T MHN-T ARC/T, KRC/T HSI-THIT-CE HCI-T CDM-T CMH/THST NAV-T SON-T, SDW-T Lucalox T SHP-T, SHP-TS
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 17
18 / Chapter 4
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T 16
14
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
1,20
016
–18
16–2
0,00
084
T 16
21
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
1,90
024
16–2
0,00
087
T 16
24
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
1,75
027
16–2
0,00
074
T 16
28
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
2,60
031
–33
16–2
0,00
093
T 16
35
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
3,30
039
–41
16–2
0,00
093
T 16
39
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
3,10
046
16–2
0,00
076
T 16
49
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
4,30
054
16–2
0,00
090
T 16
54
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
4,45
061
16–2
0,00
081
T 16
80
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 5
6,15
0ca
.88
16–2
0,00
082
T 16
-R 2
2 W
ww,
nw≥8
02
GX 1
31,
800
2612
,000
69T
16-R
40
Ww
w,nw
≥80
2 GX
13
3,20
045
–47
12,0
0071
T 16
-R 5
5 W
ww,
nw≥8
02
GX 1
34,
000
6012
,000
67T
16-R
60
Ww
w,nw
≥80
2 GX
13
5,00
066
12,0
0076
T 26
18
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 13
1,35
025
13,0
0019
–20
16–2
0,00
068
T 26
36
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 13
3,35
042
13,0
0036
16–2
0,00
089
T 26
58
Ww
w,nw
≥80
G 13
5,20
066
13,0
0054
–57
16–2
0,00
093
Lam
p na
me
Colo
urte
mpe
ratu
reCo
lour
rend
ition
inde
xR a
Lum
inou
s flu
x in
lm(a
t 25
°C)
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
max
. sys
tem
lu-
min
ous
effic
ienc
yin
lm/W
Characteristic values of the major lamps
mag
neti
c VV
Gel
ectr
onic
EVG
Base
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:49 Uhr Seite 18
Chapter 4 / 19
Com
pact
fluo
resc
ent l
amps
TC-D
/TC-
DEL
10 W
ww,
nw≥8
0G
24 d
-1/q
-160
015
8,00
012
10,0
0050
TC-D
/TC-
DEL
13 W
ww,
nw≥8
0G
24 d
-1/q
-190
017
8,00
014
10,0
0064
TC-D
/TC-
DEL
18 W
ww,
nw≥8
0G
24 d
-2/q
-21,
200
238,
000
18–2
010
,000
66TC
-T/T
C-TE
L 13
Ww
w,nw
≥80
GX 2
4 d-
1/q-
190
017
8,00
014
10,0
0064
TC-T
/TC-
TEL
18 W
ww,
nw≥8
0GX
24
d-2/
q-2
1,20
023
8,00
018
–20
10,0
0066
TC-T
/TC-
TEL
26 W
ww,
nw≥8
0GX
24
d-3/
q-3
1,80
031
8,00
028
10,0
0064
TC-T
EL/-
TELI
32
Ww
w,nw
≥80
GX 2
4 q-
32,
400
35–3
610
,000
68TC
-TEL
/-TE
LI 4
2 W
ww,
nw≥8
0GX
24
q-4
3,20
046
–47
10,0
0069
TC-T
ELI 5
7 W
ww,
nw≥8
0GX
24
q-5
4,30
062
10,0
0069
TC-T
ELI 6
0 W
w
w,nw
≥8
02G
84,
000
65
20,0
0062
TC-T
ELI 7
0 W
w
w,nw
≥8
0GX
24q-
65,
200
7510
,000
70
TC-T
ELI
85 W
w
w,nw
≥8
0 2G
86,
000
9220
,000
65TC
-TEL
I 120
W
ww,
nw
≥80
2G8
9,00
0 12
820
,000
70TC
-L 1
8 W
ww,
nw≥8
02
G 11
1,20
025
8,00
019
10,0
0063
TC-L
24
Ww
w,nw
≥80
2 G
111,
800
308,
000
25–2
710
,000
72TC
-L 3
6 W
ww,
nw≥8
02
G 11
2,90
042
8,00
034
–39
10,0
0085
TC-L
40
Ww
w,nw
≥80
2 G
113,
500
4510
,000
77TC
-L 5
5 W
ww,
nw≥8
02
G 11
4,80
055
–61
10,0
0087
TC-L
80
Ww
w,nw
≥80
2 G
116,
000
8510
,000
71
Characteristic values of the major lampsLa
mp
nam
eCo
lour
tem
pera
ture
Colo
ur re
nditi
onin
dex
R aLu
min
ous
flux
in lm
(at 2
5 °C
)
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
max
. sys
tem
lu-
min
ous
effic
ienc
yin
lm/W
Base
mag
neti
c VV
Gel
ectr
onic
EVG
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 19
20 / Chapter 4
Indu
ctio
n la
mps
LMG-
IHf 5
5 W
(QL
55 W
)w
w,nw
≥80
Spec
ial
3,50
055
60,0
0064
LMG-
IHf 8
5 W
(QL
85 W
)w
w,nw
≥80
Spec
ial
6,00
085
60,0
0071
LMG-
IHf 1
65 W
(QL
165
W)w
w,nw
≥80
Spec
ial
12,0
0016
560
,000
73
Low
-vol
tage
hal
ogen
lam
psQT
12
35 W
ww
≥90
GY 6
.35
600
4,00
016
QT 1
2 50
Ww
w≥9
0GY
6.3
593
04,
000
18QR
CBC
51
35 W
(8–6
0°)
ww
≥90
GU 5
.3*7
00–1
4,00
04,
000
16QR
CBC
51
50 W
(8–6
0°)
ww
≥90
GU 5
.3*9
50–1
4,00
04,
000
18QR
111
75
W (8
–45°
)w
w≥9
0G
53*1
.700
–30,
000
3,00
010
QR 1
11 1
00 W
(8–4
5°)
ww
≥90
G 53
*2.8
00–4
8,00
03,
000
10
High
-vol
tage
hal
ogen
lam
psQT
-DE
12 1
50 W
L 1
14,2
ww
≥90
R7s
2,20
01,
500
14QT
-DE
12 3
00 W
ww
≥90
R7s
5,00
02,
000
16QT
-DE
12 5
00 W
ww
≥90
R7s
9,50
02,
000
19QT
32
100
W m
att
ww
≥90
E 27
1,43
02,
000
14QT
32
150
W m
att
ww
≥90
E 27
2,40
02,
000
16QT
32
250
W m
att
ww
≥90
E 27
4,00
02,
000
16
Characteristic values of the major lamps
*Axia
l lum
inou
s in
tens
ity in
cd.
Lam
p na
me
Colo
urte
mpe
ratu
reCo
lour
rend
ition
inde
xR a
Lum
inou
s flu
x in
lm(a
t 25
°C)
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
max
. sys
tem
lu-
min
ous
effic
ienc
yin
lm/W
Base
mag
neti
c VV
Gel
ectr
onic
EVG
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 20
Chapter 4 / 21
Met
al h
alid
e la
mps
HIE
70 W
ww,
nw≥8
0,≥7
0E
274,
900–
5,00
082
–96
6,00
080
–83
6,00
063
HIE
100
Ww
w,nw
≥80,
≥70
E 27
7,30
0–8,
100
112–
115
6,00
072
HIE
150
Ww
w,nw
≥80,
≥70
E 27
10,5
00–1
2,50
016
8–17
76,
000
172
6,00
074
HIE
250
Ww
w,nw
,tw
≥90,
≥60,
≥70
E 40
17,0
0–25
5,00
027
5–28
56,
000
93HI
E 40
0 W
nw,t
w≥9
0,≥6
0,≥7
0E
4020
,500
–43,
000
400–
460
6,00
093
HIE
1000
Wnw
≥60
E 40
95,0
0010
50–1
065
6,00
090
HIT
70 W
(qua
rtz)
ww,
nw≥8
0G
125,
200–
5,50
082
–96
6,00
080
–83
6,00
069
HIT
150
W (q
uartz
)w
w,nw
≥80
G 12
13,0
0016
8–17
76,
000
172
6,00
077
HIT/
HIT-
TC 3
5 W
(cer
amic
)w
w≥8
0G8
.5/G
123,
400
44–4
69,
000
42–4
59–
12,0
0080
HIT/
HIT-
TC 7
0 W
(cer
amic
)w
w,nw
≥80
G8.5
/G12
6,40
0–6,
600
82–9
69,
000
80–8
39–
12,0
0083
HIT
150
W (c
eram
ic)
ww,
nw≥8
0G
1214
,000
168–
177
6,00
017
26–
12,0
0083
HIT
250
Wnw
,tw
≥90,
≥60,
≥70
E 40
19,0
00–2
1,00
027
5–28
56,
000
76HI
T 40
0 W
nw,t
w≥9
0,≥6
0,≥7
0E
4025
,000
–42,
000
400–
460
6,00
091
HIT-
DE 7
0 W
(qua
rtz)
ww,
nw≥9
0,≥8
0RX
7s
5,00
0–6,
000
82–9
66,
000
80–8
36,
000
75HI
T-DE
150
W (q
uartz
)w
w,nw
,tw
≥90,
≥80,
≥70
RX 7
s11
,250
168–
177
6,00
017
26,
000
66HI
T-DE
70
W (c
eram
ic)
ww,
nw≥9
0,≥8
0RX
7s
5,70
0–7,
000
89–9
57,
000
80–8
37–
15,0
0079
HIT-
DE 1
50 W
(cer
amic
)w
w,nw
≥90,
≥80
RX 7
s13
,500
–14,
200
168–
177
12,0
0017
212
–15,
000
80HI
T-DE
250
Ww
w,nw
,tw
≥90,
≥80,
≥70
Fc 2
20,0
0027
5–28
56,
000
72
Characteristic values of the major lampsLa
mp
nam
eCo
lour
tem
pera
ture
Colo
ur re
nditi
onin
dex
R aLu
min
ous
flux
in lm
(at 2
5 °C
)
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
max
. sys
tem
lu-
min
ous
effic
ienc
yin
lm/W
Base
mag
neti
c VV
Gel
ectr
onic
EVG
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 21
22 / Chapter 4
High
-pre
ssur
e m
ercu
ry v
apou
r lam
psHM
E 25
0 W
ww,
nw≥4
0E
4013
,000
266–
270
8,00
048
HME
400
Ww
w,nw
≥40
E 40
22,0
0042
58,
000
51
High
-pre
ssur
e so
dium
vap
our l
amps
HSE
250
Ww
w≥6
0,≥2
0E
4022
,000
–32,
000
275–
285
10,0
0011
2HS
E 40
0 W
ww
≥60,
≥20
E 40
36,0
00–5
4,00
044
0–45
010
,000
120
HST
35 W
(SDW
-T)
ww
≥80
PG 1
2-1
1,30
041
–42
10,0
0031
HST
50 W
(SDW
-T/T
G)w
w≥8
0PG
12-
1/G1
22,
300
6610
,000
34HS
T 10
0 W
(SDW
-T/T
G)w
w≥8
0PG
12-
1/G1
24,
800
114–
116
10,0
0042
HST
250
Ww
w≥6
0,≥2
0E
4023
,000
–33,
000
275
10,0
0011
6HS
T 40
0 W
ww
≥60,
≥20
E 40
37,0
00–5
6,50
044
0–45
010
,000
123
Characteristic values of the major lampsLa
mp
nam
eCo
lour
tem
pera
ture
Colo
ur re
nditi
onin
dex
R aLu
min
ous
flux
in lm
(at 2
5 °C
)
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
Syst
empo
wer
in W
Lam
pse
rvic
e lif
ein
h
max
. sys
tem
lu-
min
ous
effic
ienc
yin
lm/W
Base
mag
neti
c VV
Gel
ectr
onic
EVG
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 22
Chapter 4 / 23
Class Ballasts
A1 Dimmable electronic ballastsA2 Reduced-loss electronic ballastsA3 Electronic ballastsB1 Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low-loss ballast)B2 Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low-loss ballast)C Magnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional
ballast)D Magnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional
ballast)
Energy efficiency of luminaires
Most of the electrical power is consumed in the lamp and itscontrol gear. In order to clarify the power consumption of theballast/lamp system, the European Union has adopted theenergy classification system (Directive 2000/55/EU on energyefficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps).
The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index) classifies ballasts into sevencategories:
Sales of class D ballasts have been prohibited since 21 May2002; class C ballasts must be taken off the market by21 November 2005 at the latest.
Example for T26 36 W 840:
EEI
A1 ≤ 19 W (25 % dimming is equivalent to 50 % A3)A2 ≤ 36A3 ≤ 38B1 ≤ 41B2 ≤ 43C ≤ 45D ≤ 45
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 23
24 / Chapter 4
Properties of dimmable electronic ballasts
Prop
ertie
sAn
alog
(1–1
0 V)
Digi
tal (
DSI)
Digi
tal (
DALI
)
Func
tiona
lity
Dim
ming
rang
e in
AC m
ode
1 or
3–1
00 %
1 or
3–1
00 %
0.1–
100
% (d
epen
ds o
n lam
p)Di
mm
ing le
vel t
olera
nce
Fluct
uatio
nsno
neno
neCo
ntro
l line
plus/
minu
sInt
erch
ange
able
polar
ityInt
erch
ange
able
polar
ityZe
ro-p
ower
swi
tchin
gno
yes
yes
Stat
us re
port
& log
ging
noye
s,on
ly PC
A Ex
cel o
ne4a
llye
sAd
dres
sing
Lum
inaire
gro
up; a
ll lum
inaire
s Lu
mina
ire g
roup
; all
lumina
ires
Indivi
dual
lumina
ires
or
on o
ne c
ontro
l line
on o
ne c
ontro
l line
lumina
ire g
roup
s
Visu
al c
omfo
rtSt
able
and
flicke
r-fre
e lam
p op
erat
ionye
sye
sye
sDi
mm
ing c
urve
linea
rlog
arith
mic
**log
arithm
ic **
Addi
tiona
l em
erge
ncy
light
ing
not p
ossib
leDi
mm
ing le
vel c
an b
e se
t by
cust
omer
1 o
r 3–7
0 %
( PC
A Ex
cel o
ne4a
ll )
func
tion
(DC
mod
e)un
iform
sur
face
illum
inatio
n po
ssibl
e in
emer
genc
y lig
hting
mod
e,dim
ming
-leve
lm
emor
y wi
th a
utom
atic
reca
ll in
emer
genc
y lig
hting
mod
e ( P
CA E
xcel
one4
all)
LUXM
ATE
conn
ectio
nLU
XMAT
E Ba
sic*
LMB
LUXM
ATE
Emot
ion*
DALI
ONLY
LUXM
ATE
Prof
essi
onal
*LD
E (P
CA E
xcel
one4
all)
LDE
*se
e ch
apte
r 5**
mat
ches
visu
al pe
rcep
tion
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 24
Chapter 4 / 25
69 W
Power consumption –20 % to –88 %
100 % 75 % 50 % 25 % 1 %
25 W
35 W
45 W
Dimmer settingControlled by LUXMATEConventional ballast
Powe
r con
sum
ptio
n as
a
func
tion
of d
imm
er se
tting 55 W
8 W8 W 8 W
55–8 W
A
in (%)
Energy saving using Set-DC
potential energy saving
of 52 %
100908070605040302010
0
AC-mode
DC-mode
further potential energy saving of 27 %
59 53 48 43 39 35 30 28 22 17 12 10Power (W)at 230 V DC
absent
absent
cloud cover
increasing daylight
sufficient daylight
decreasing daylight
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00
Power requirement of a freestanding luminaire using SensControl
PPower requirement of a traditional freestanding luminaireraditional freestanding luminaire
Energy saving at normal operationSet-AC
compared with conventional ballasts 20 % to 88 %
at 1 % dimming level (off)
Additional emergency lighting functionwith PCA Excel one4all(central power supply)
Set-DCSaving:
up to 70 %,at 10 % luminous flux
reduced use of group batteries andcentral installations
Potential energy savingsusing daylight sensors
and presence detectorsup to 70 %
comparedwith
constant lighte.g. free-standing luminaire
usingSensControl
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
04_LAMPEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 8:50 Uhr Seite 25
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
LUXMATE lighting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Dimming with LUXMATE Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3LUXMATE Basic system overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 9Dimming and switching with LUXMATE Emotion
LUXMATE EMOTION system overviews + optionalintegration of ONLITE Local Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 13
LUXMATE Professional system overview (selection) . . . 14 – 15ONLITE emergency lighting system(applicable to U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 – 25
Chapter 5
Lighting and room management,emergency lighting
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 1
Luxmate lighting management – The intelligent control system for individual roomsand throughout buildings
Function Applications
Room management systems
LUXMATE Professional (based on LUXMATE bus system)– Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Conference rooms– Interfaces to media technology – Office buildings– Integration of ONLITE – Shopping malls
emergency lighting system – Museums– Interface to building management – Industry
system and central maintenance– Customized operating systems
Lighting control systems
LUXMATE EMOTION (based on DALI)– Lighting scenes – Shops– Timer – Health & Care– RGB dimming software – Wellness– ACTIVE LIGHT lighting concepts – Control rooms– Flexibility of individual – Offices
addressing/grouping – In the home
LUXMATE Basic (based on DSI)– Daylight-based – In the home– Infrared remote control unit – Small offices & – Standard switch components surgeries– No addressing, group dimming – Commercial – Zero-power switching and premises
dimming
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 5 / 3
Lam
psDi
mm
ing
rang
eCo
ntro
l gea
r/di
mm
erGe
nera
l pur
pose
lam
ps10
0–0
%PD
AX 5
00 V
A PA
R la
mps
,Hal
ogen
PDAS
1,0
00 V
Ain
cand
esce
nt la
mps
phas
e di
mm
er
Low
-vol
tage
hal
ogen
10
0–0
%DA
LI T
E on
e4al
lin
cand
esce
nt la
mps
105
VA/1
50VA
Dim
mab
leT1
6/T2
6 10
0–1
%DS
I ele
ctro
nic
balla
st
fluor
esce
nt la
mps
TC 1
00–3
%(L
MB)
LED
100–
0 %
PWM
con
verte
r LED
K210
one
4all
25 W
STAR
LFEX
100–
0 %
DALI
TE
one4
all
optic
al fi
bre
105
VA/1
50VA
QT e
ngin
es
Dim
min
g w
ith L
UXM
ATE
Basi
c (n
o ad
dres
sing
requ
ired)
Num
ber
Outp
ut
Oper
atio
nFu
nctio
npo
ssib
lem
odul
e25
/73*
DSI-T
**M
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
h,On
/Off,
dim
min
gpr
esen
ce d
etec
tor
25/7
3*DS
I-TD*
*M
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
hOn
/Off,
dim
min
g,1
scen
e
100/
148*
DSI-T
SM
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
hOn
/Off,
dim
min
g
2x2
5/73
*DS
I-BLC
**M
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
hOn
/Off,
dim
min
g,D/
ID
Bala
nced
Lig
htin
g
2x2
5/73
*DS
I-2IR
Mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n sw
itch,
On/O
ff,di
mm
ing,
3 lig
htin
gre
mot
e co
ntro
l uni
tsc
enes
per
out
put
2x2
5/73
*DS
I-IRB
LCM
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
h,On
/Off,
dim
min
g,D/
ID
rem
ote
cont
rol u
nit
Bala
nced
Lig
htin
g
2x2
5/73
*DS
I-TLC
**M
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
h,On
/Off,
dim
min
g,da
yligh
t-lig
ht s
enso
r,pr
esen
ce d
etec
tor
depe
nden
t dim
min
g
3x1
00/1
48*
DSI-T
LE**
Mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n sw
itch,
On/O
ff,di
mm
ing,
dayli
ght-
light
sen
sor
depe
nden
t dim
min
g
* nu
mbe
r can
be
incr
ease
d us
ing
DSI-V
am
plifi
er,*
* DA
LI v
ersi
ons
avai
labl
e on
requ
est
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 5
LUXMATE Basic DSI-TD or DALI-TD“Dimming using conventional momentary-action light switches andwith dimming-level memory” (DALI-TD available on request)
NL' N L
Mai
ns 2
30 V
/50
Hz
NL
Cont
rol l
ine
e.g.
NYM
2 x
1.5
mm
2 , max
. len
gth
100
m
max
. 2 m
2
D1 D2
D 2D 1
Conv
entio
nal d
oubl
em
omen
tary
-act
ion
ligh
t swi
tch
On/O
ffDi
mm
ing
NL T T Pres
et/D
ia
Conv
entio
nal m
omen
tary
-ac
tion
light
swi
tch
Pres
et/D
ia
D 2D 1
Mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n sw
itch
cont
rol
mod
ule
with
inpu
t for
pre
set l
ight
leve
l
up to
25
DALI
elec
tr. b
allas
ts*up
to 2
5 DS
I ele
ctr.
balla
sts
L N D 1 D 2
PE
up to
25
DSI p
hase
dim
mer
sup
to 2
5 DA
LI p
hase
dim
mer
s*
or or up to
25
DSI t
rans
form
ers
up to
25
DALI
tran
sfor
mer
s*
LV h
alog
en in
cand
esce
ntla
mps
max
. 70/
105/
150/
210
VA*
avai
labl
e on
requ
est
Inca
ndes
cent
lam
ps/
HV h
alog
en in
-ca
ndes
cent
lam
ps m
ax. 3
00 V
A
12 11 910
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
EL
Alte
rnat
ive:
Conn
ect t
erm
inal
s “
T ”
and
“T ”
toge
ther
with
a ju
mpe
r if a
sin
gle
mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n s
witc
h is
use
d.
Prog
ram
min
g in
stru
ctio
ns fo
r pre
set l
ight
leve
l (Di
a):
• S
et b
right
ness
leve
l req
uire
d us
ing
m
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
h•
Pre
ss th
e Pr
eset
/Dia
swi
tch
for a
t
leas
t 5 s
econ
ds
User
con
trol
uni
tsCo
ntro
l uni
tsLa
mp
cont
rol g
ear
Lam
ps
DSI-
TDDA
LI-T
D
PCA
APD
TEL
Arg
um
en
ts f
or
you
r c
ust
om
ers
•Ab
solu
tely
flick
er-f
ree
dim
min
g •
Sim
ple
to o
pera
te u
sing
con
vent
iona
l mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n lig
ht s
witc
hes
thro
ugho
ut•
Henc
e en
sure
s st
anda
rdis
ed d
esig
n of
ligh
t sw
itche
s an
d so
cket
s•
Any
num
ber o
f mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n lig
ht s
witc
hes
can
be c
onne
cted
in p
aral
lel
•Di
mm
ing
rang
e 1
or 3
–100
% li
ght l
evel
•La
mps
can
be
star
ted
at a
ny d
imm
ing
leve
l•
Suita
ble
for a
ll m
ajor
lam
p ty
pes
•Ea
sy to
inst
all
•In
sens
itive
to m
ains
fluc
tuat
ions
and
inte
rfere
nce
•Co
mpo
nent
s ca
n be
del
ivere
d se
para
tely
or p
re-f
itted
in th
e lu
min
aire
•Di
mm
ing-
leve
l mem
ory
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 5 / 5
LUXMATE Basic IR“Dimming of luminaires by infrared remote control unit”
up to
5 c
eilin
g-m
ount
ed
IRED
IR s
enso
rs
IRS
IR re
mot
e co
ntro
l uni
tm
ax. r
ange
10
m a
t 50
0 lu
xup
to 7
IRS
chan
nels
can
be
use
d
N 23
0 V/
50 H
z
L N D 1 D 2
12 11 910 NL' N L
D 2D 1D 1 D 2
Inca
ndes
cent
lam
ps/H
V ha
loge
n in
-
cand
esce
nt la
mps
max
. 300
VA
DSI e
lect
roni
c ba
llast
DSI p
hase
dim
mer
SI
tran
sfor
mer
4 3 2 18 7 6 5
max. 25 PCA, PHD, TEL
max. 25 PCA, PHD, TEL
IR1
IR2 D1
D2D1
D2
Grou
p 1
L N TT
TTDS
I-2IR
infra
red
cont
rol m
odul
eGroup 1 Group 2
Up to
5 lu
min
aire
gro
ups
for e
ach
inst
alla
tion
DSI c
ontro
l lin
es, m
ax. l
engt
h 50
m
max
. le
ngth
50
m
If m
ore
than
one
DSI
mod
ule
is u
sed,
on
e m
ust b
e se
t as
mas
ter,
the
othe
rs a
s sl
aves
L N PE
* Si
ngle
-swi
tch
cont
rol
LV h
alog
en in
cand
esce
nt la
mps
70/
105/
150/
210
VAm
ax.
leng
th 2
m
L N D 1 D 2
12 11 910 NL' N L
D 2D 1D 1 D 2DSI e
lect
roni
c ba
llast
DSI p
hase
dim
mer
DSI t
rans
form
er
4 3 2 18 7 6 5
Grou
p 2
max
. le
ngth
2 m
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
EL
User
con
trol
uni
tsCo
ntro
l uni
tsLa
mp
cont
rol g
ear
Lam
psLa
mp
cont
rol g
ear
Lam
ps
* *
Arg
um
en
ts f
or
you
r c
ust
om
ers
•Co
nven
ient
ope
ratio
n us
ing
infra
red
rem
ote
cont
rol u
nit
•Re
mot
e co
ntro
l uni
t com
es c
ompl
ete
with
wal
l bra
cket
•Ho
rizon
tal/v
ertic
al tr
ansm
issi
on c
hara
cter
istic
s•
Can
run
thre
e lig
htin
g sc
enes
•In
divid
ual d
imm
ing
of fi
ve lu
min
aire
gro
ups
•Ea
sy to
inst
all
•Co
mpo
nent
s ca
n be
del
ivere
d se
para
tely
or p
re-f
itted
in th
e lu
min
aire
•Up
to e
ight
mod
ules
per
infra
red
circ
uit
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 5
LUXMATE Basic Daylight DSI-TLC or DALI-TLCDaylight-based control (DALI-TLC available on request)for small rooms
A p p l i c a t i o n s• Single and team offices• Areas near windows in shopping centres• Classrooms• Corridors and passageways
A r g u m e n t s f o r y o u r c u s t o m e r s• Dims the lighting from 100–1 %, based exactly on the daylight
available• Accurate window-light sensor rather than error-prone room-
light sensor• Energy savings of up to 75 %• Brightness level can be changed at any time using momentary-
action dimmer switches• Economically priced – short pay-back period• Long lamp service life• Option to connect presence detector
S e e p a g e 8 f o r s e n s o r p o s i t i o n i n g !
0 % 50 %
500 lxartificial light
daylight
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 5 / 7
LUXMATE Basic Daylight DSI-TLC or DALI-TLC“Daylight-based control (DALI-TLC available on request)for small rooms”
L N D 1 D 2 L N D 1 D 2
NL T1
T2T3
T4PD
in
D 1D 2
D 3D 4
Se1
Se2
Mai
ns 2
30 V
/50
HzNL PE
LSD
light
sen
sor
Conv
entio
nal d
oubl
e m
omen
tary
-act
ion
ligh
t swi
tch
On/O
ffDi
mm
ing
Mot
ion
sens
or/
Pres
ence
det
ecto
r
DSI-T
LC d
aylig
ht-b
ased
con
trol m
odul
ein
stal
led
in lu
min
aire
/rece
ssed
into
cei
ling
Ligh
t-se
nsor
line
e.g.
NYM
2 x
1.5
mm
2 , max
. len
gth
100
m
Cont
rol l
ine
e.g.
NYM
2 x
1.5
mm
2
max
. len
gth
100
m
up to
25
DALI
ele
ctr.
balla
sts/
Grou
p II
Gro
up I
I
Gro
up I
12 11 910 12 11 910
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
EL
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
ELup
to 2
5 DS
I ele
ctro
nic
balla
sts/
Grou
p II
up to
25
DALI
ele
ctr.
balla
sts/
Grou
p I
up to
25
DSI e
lect
roni
c ba
llast
s/Gr
oup
I
User
con
trol
uni
tsCo
ntro
l uni
tsLa
mp
cont
rol g
ear
Lam
ps
G I
G II
PCA
PCA
DSI-
TLC
DALI
-TLC
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 5
LUXMATE Basic Daylight DSI-TLE or DALI-TLEDaylight-based control (DALI-TLE available on request)for large rooms
A p p l i c a t i o n s• Open-plan offices• Manufacturing bays, warehouses, sports halls and gymnasiums• Supermarkets etc.
Arg
um
en
ts f
or
you
r c
ust
om
ers
: se
e
pa
ge
6!
0 % 50 % 80 %
5 m 4 m 3 m0 m
1 m
2 m
3 m
4 m
5 m
6 m
2 m2.5 m 1 m
Window height = 2.5 m
Vertical sensor positioning
°
5 m 4 m 3 m 2 m2.5 m 1 m 0 m
2 m
3 m
1 m
1 m
2 m
3 m
0 m
Window width = 4.0 m
Horizontal sensor positioning
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 5 / 9
NL
On/O
ffAu
to/M
an UpDo
wn
III
IIISe
LSD
light
sen
sor
mou
nted
on
ceili
ng
Conv
entio
nal
ser
ial s
witc
h
Dim
min
g us
ing
con
vent
iona
l dou
ble
mom
enta
ry-a
ctio
n li
ght s
witc
h
DSI-
TLE
dayl
ight
-ba
sed
cont
rol
mod
ule
for 3
gro
ups,
in
stal
led
in
switc
h ca
bine
t
up to
100
DSI
ele
ctr.
balla
sts/
Grou
p I,
II, II
I up
to 6
4 DA
LI e
lect
r. ba
llast
s/Gr
oup
I, II,
III
up to
100
DSI
ele
ctr.
balla
sts/
Grou
p I,
II, II
I up
to 6
4 DA
LI e
lect
r. ba
llast
s/Gr
oup
I, II,
III
up to
100
DSI
ele
ctr.
balla
sts/
Grou
p I,
II, II
I up
to 6
4 DA
LI e
lect
r. ba
llast
s/Gr
oup
I, II,
III
Gro
up I
II
Gro
up I
Gro
up I
I
Ligh
t-se
nsor
line
e.g.
NYM
2 x
1.5
mm
2
max
. len
gth
250
m
Cont
rol l
ine
e.g.
NYM
2 x
1.5
mm
2
max
. len
gth
250
m
Inse
rt ju
mpe
r be
twee
n Up
/Dow
n fo
r sin
gle
mom
enta
ry-
actio
n sw
itch
NL PE On/O
ff
Auto
mat
ic/M
anua
l
L N D 1 D 2
12 11 910
L N D 1 D 2
12 11 910
L N D 1 D 2
12 11 910
Alte
rnat
ive:
Con
nect
the
“Up”
and
“D
own”
term
inal
s to
geth
er w
ith a
ju
mpe
r whe
n us
ing
a si
ngle
m
omen
tary
-act
ion
switc
h.
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
EL
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
EL
Fluo
resc
ent l
amps
T26
/T16
TC-L
/TC-
DEL/
TC-T
EL
User
con
trol
uni
tsCo
ntro
l uni
tsLa
mp
cont
rol g
ear
Lam
ps
PCA
PCA
PCA
DSI-
TLE
DALI
-TLE
LUXMATE Basic Daylight DSI-TLE or DALI-TLE“Daylight-based control for large rooms”
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 5
Lam
psDi
mm
ing/
Co
ntro
l gea
r/
DALI
Cont
rol
switc
hing
rang
edi
mm
erlo
ads
unit
Gene
ral-p
urpo
se
100–
0 %
EMOT
ION -
APDX
1la
mps
,PAR
lam
ps,
500
VA,1
,000
VA
Halo
gen
inca
ndes
-SD
K-AN
-06,
1,40
0 VA
1AN
ASce
nt la
mps
SD
K-AB
-05,
1,20
0 VA
Low
-vol
tage
hal
ogen
100–
0 %
DALI
TE
one4
all
1in
cand
esce
nt la
mps
105
VA,1
50 V
ADi
scha
rge
lam
psHI
T 10
0 %
Elec
troni
c/10
1RUK
,4A2)
SDW
-T 1
00 %
conv
entio
nal b
alla
st1
4RUK
S,4x
16A3)
HS 3
0,50
,100
%HM
50,
100
%In
duct
ion
lam
psQL
100
%Sw
itcha
ble
100
%flu
ores
cent
lam
psDi
mm
able
T1
6/T2
6 10
0–1
%DA
LI e
lect
roni
c ba
llast
1
fluor
esce
nt la
mps
TC 1
00–3
%(L
DE-D
O)
Oper
atio
nFu
nctio
n
EMOT
ION
On/O
ff,di
mm
ing,
Touc
h16
x 1
6 ro
om-b
ased
ligh
ting
scen
esst
atic
or A
ctive
Lig
htTi
med
ligh
ting
scen
es
Mom
enta
ry-
On/O
ff,di
mm
ing,
actio
n sw
itch1)
Mot
ion
sens
or1)
Callin
g up
/cha
ngin
g sc
enes
EMOT
ION
Dow
nloa
d/up
load
via
RS
232
Touc
hin
terfa
cePC
sof
twar
eAd
dres
sing,
scen
es,s
hows
,tim
e en
tries
Dim
min
g an
d sw
itchi
ng w
ith L
UXM
ATE
Emot
ion
+ o
ptio
nal i
nteg
ratio
n of
ONL
ITE
Loca
l Che
ck(2
x 6
4 DA
LI a
ddre
sses
,2 x
99
DALI
load
s)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 5 / 11
LED
100–
0 %
LED
K210
/K21
1 25
W1
STAR
FLEX
QT
100–
0 %
dim
mab
le tr
ansf
.1–1
0 V
1AN
ASST
ARFL
EX H
IT10
0 %
elec
troni
c ba
llast
150
W1
4RUK
S,4x
16A
conv
entio
nal b
allas
t 250
W1
4RUK
S,4x
16A
colo
ur w
heel
1AN
ASdi
mm
ing
whe
el1
ANAS
Esca
pe-s
ign
70 %
Emer
genc
y lig
htin
g el
ectr.
1lu
min
aire
s (T
,TC)
balla
st (L
ocal
Che
ck)
Emer
genc
yDe
pend
s on
DA
LI e
lect
roni
c ba
llast
+
3lu
min
aire
s (T
,TC)
wat
tage
4)em
erge
ncy
light
ing
elec
troni
c ba
llast
(L
ocal
Che
ck N
T1-N
T3)
ONLI
TE S
B 12
8No
n-m
aint
aine
d/m
aint
aine
d m
ode
can
Loca
l Che
ckbe
set
for e
ach
lum
inai
reCo
ntro
ller5)
Rand
om te
st fu
nctio
nPr
ogra
mm
able
func
tion
test
/dur
atio
n te
stTe
st lo
g bo
ok fu
nctio
n (p
rinta
ble6)
)Al
arm
out
put (
buzz
er,r
elay
cont
act 2
4 V,
GSM
,SM
S7))
Loca
l Che
ckDo
wnl
oad/
uplo
ad v
ia R
S 23
2 Co
ntro
ller3)
inte
rface
PC s
oftw
are
Conf
igur
atio
n da
ta,t
est l
og b
ook
1)via
EM
OTIO
N SD
ED,5
DAL
I loa
ds2)
not f
or D
isch
arge
lam
ps,o
ther
wis
e ca
n on
ly be
use
das
con
tact
or re
lay
3)av
aila
ble
on re
ques
t4)
deta
ils in
ONL
ITE
prod
uct b
roch
ure
5)in
clude
s bu
s su
pply,
EMOT
ION
BV b
us s
uppl
y no
t req
uire
d
6)w
ith O
NLIT
E Lo
cal C
heck
pow
er s
uppl
y an
d pr
inte
r7)
with
ONL
ITE
Loca
l Che
ck p
ower
sup
ply
and
GSM
mod
ule
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 11
Mains 230 V/50 Hz NL
NL
PE
NL
Line 2:DALI control line
e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm2
max. length 300 mmax. 64 users (addresses)
99 DALI loads
Line 1:DALI control line
e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm2
max. length 300 mmax. 64 users (addresses)
99 DALI loads
DADA DADA
DADA DADA
EMOTION-SDED (5 DALI loads)
max. 0.25 m, cable included in supply
T1COM T2 T3 T4
T1COM T3COM T4COMT2
ONLITE SB 128LOCAL CHECK controller,integral bus supply
Use EMOTION BV bus supply if ONLITE not included in system
Conductor cross-sections DALI control line
2 x 0.50 mm2
2 x 0.75 mm2
2 x 1.00 mm2
2 x 1.50 mm2
Cable length
116 m174 m232 m300 m
Lamp type
A, PAR, QTT16/T26 with low-loss ballast (parallel p.f. corrected)TC with low-loss ballast(parallel p.f. corrected)T16/T26/TC with electr. ballast LV with transformerHIT, SDW-T, HS, HM
Safe installed loadEMOTION 1 RUK
500 W250 W
250 W
30A for 0.5 s max.30A for 0.5 s max.–
EMOTION 4RUKS
4 x 2,000 W4 x 920 W
4 x 800 W
4 x 10 A4 x 10 A4 x 800 W
DADADADA DADA
EKXP installation box(please order separately)
EMOTION Touch
LSD* light sensor
LM-CS(X)*control point
LUXMATE EMOTION “Lighting control system”
12 / Chapter 5
Operation/supply
Cable lengths of DALI control line
Switching lamps using LUXMATE EMOTION
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 12
Escape-sign luminaireLOCAL CHECK(1 DALI load)
1211
910
Fluorescent lamps T26/T16TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
LNDADA DALI electronic ballast (1 DALI load)
e.g. HIT luminairesK'K
DADA
EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads)
EMOTION 4RUKS (1 DALI load)
LN
DA DA
K1'K1
K2'K2
K3'K3
K4'K4
NL'
Incandescent lamps/HV halogen incandescent lamps
DADANL
Emotion APD (1 DALI load)
max. 2 m
LV halogen incandescent lamps
DA DA DALI-TE (1 DALI load)
GR
BLED luminaires
DADA
DALI LED converter(1 DALI load)
NL
0/1–10 V unitse.g. STARFLEX fibre optics(1 DALI load)
DA
DAEMOTION ANAS(1 DALI load)
TECTON trunkingPROTON TEC*SPIRIT TEC
LN
DA DA
LN
DA DA
Locally supplied emergency luminaireLOCAL CHECK NT1-NT3(3 DALI loads)
LN
DA DA
* available on request
LN
DA DA
t
D2D1
D2D1
25 DSI luminaires
25 DSI luminairesDALI-DSI*
Chapter 5 / 13
Lighting/emergency lighting
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 5
LUXMATE Professional (selection)
LM-PFCInstallation-specific operation IRED
IRS
LM-IRB
LM-SWED
LM-SDED
For dimming and switching individual luminaire groups
LM-RV LM-2LSE LM-2JSM
Screen Blinds Blinds
LM-SI03
LM-BVS35
L, N L, N L, N
Partitionswitch
RS-232 link to AV systemASCII plain text protocol
Bus
MainsDSI- or DALI control lineSensor cable
LM-MPA/LM-CPASingle-room solution
LM-CG/LM-EGMulti-room solution
Motor 1
LM-CS(X)control point
B1, B2, L, N B1, B2, L, NB1, B2
B1, B2, L, N
B1, B2 L, N
B1, B2
B1, B2
Motor 2
B1, B2B1, B2 K1
LM-ZSM
Timer control
L, N L, N
LM-iZSQ
Sequenceautomation
B1, B2B1, B2
L, N
B1, B2
L, N
24VDC24VAC
230VAC
Window Window
Motor 1 Motor 2
LM-2FSE
L, N
B1, B2
Commissioning/user control units
Room management/central control/automation
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 14
Chapter 5 / 15
LM-2TLLM 2TL DALI
LSDFluorescent lamps
LM-DALI
DALI-PCA
DALI-APD
DALI-TEL
DALI LED converter
up to 64 ballasts in 16 groups
Local checkrepeater
SB 128 local checkCTP
locally supplied LOCAL CHECK emergency luminaire
ONLITE interface, emergency lighting
LOCAL CHECK escape-sign luminaire
LED luminaires
LV halogen incandescent lamps
Incandescent lamps/HV halogen incandescent lamps
Fluorescent lamps
LM-2RUKElectronic/conven-tional ballast for discharge lamps
K', K
HIT/HST/HME lamps
B1, B2
B1, B2
B1, B2
D1, D2
D1, D2
D1, D2
D1, D2
D1, D2
D1, D2
D1, D2
L, N
D1, D2
L, N
L, N
LM-DSI up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts
Fluorescent lamps
D1, D2 D1, D2B1, B2
L, N
L, N
L, N
L, N
L, N
option to connect a daylight sensor to the LM-STL or LM-2TL/DALI
LM DALI-S
D1, D2
up to 10 DSI electronic ballastsup to 10 DALI electronic ballasts
up to 10 DSI electronic ballastsup to 10 DALI electronic ballasts
Lighting management
DSI dimming
Switching
Daylight-based dimming (DSI or DALI)
ONLITE interface for emergency lighting/local supply
DALI dimming
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 5
Types of Zumtobel Staff emergency luminaires
ONLITE emergency lighting system(applicable to U.K.)
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Emergency lighting
anti-paniclighting
Standbylighting
for escaperoutes and
rooms
for work-places with
particular risk
local solo:• Local battery• Function
display• Manual
test, notmonitored
local check:Autotest, notmonitored
• Group orcentralbattery
• Centralmonitoring
• Automatictesting
• Test logbook listing
ONLITE local ONLITE central
central test:• Monitoring
of up to4x64 lumi-naires by
e-DALI; function test and dur-ation test are programmable
• Test log book listing
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 16
Chapter 5 / 17
Routine Testing and Maintenance of Emergency LightingIt is important that equipment is properly tested and maintained if it isto function correctly when required in an emergency. All emergencylighting should be regularly checked and maintained by a competentperson in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations. The fol-lowing table shows the routine testing of emergency lighting equipmentthat should take place.
Daily • Visually check that all maintained lamps are operatingand that all system healthy indicators on Central PowerSupply Systems (Central Battery Systems) are illumin-ated.
• Check that any system fault recorded is given urgentattention and record all corrective actions in the logbook provided.
Monthly • Check all luminaries and other emergency lightingequipment is in a good condition, all lamps and lightcontrollers are clean, undamaged and not blackened.
• Briefly test all emergency lighting equipment by simu-lating a failure of the normal lighting supply. The testshould not exceed a quarter of the equipment ratedduration. Check that all equipment functions correctly.
• Check that, upon restoring the mains supply, all supplyhealthy indicators are again illuminated.
Sixmonthly
• Carry out the inspection and testing as described inthe monthly test schedule, but conduct a test of theequipment for one third of its rated duration.
Annually* • A full system test should be conducted by a competentservice engineer including a full rated duration test ofthe system.
• Compliance of the installation and system with therequirements of BS5266/BSEN 1838 should be con-sidered and documented.
The results of all testing and any necessary corrective action shouldbe recorded in a log record held on site which shall be available ifrequired, for inspection by any authorised person.
* The publication of prEN50172 will change the requirements ofBS5266 Part1. prEN50172 changes the requirements for the firstthree years of self-contained luminaires to be annual full durationtests.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 17
18 / Chapter 5
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Not A
pplic
able
Does
Not
Com
ply
3 Where artificial lighting is installed, is emergency lightingfitted on the escape routes andin open areas?
6.g),6.h)
Is emergency lighting and firesafety signage on the existingescape routes adequate topermit occupants to reach aplace of safety within 2–3 minutes?
6.j Is emergency lighting installedin all open areasof greater than 60m2
6.d),6.e), 7
If there are special risks e.g.flammable materials used inprocesses, or areas havingrestricted access, is emergencylighting fitted?
E1 Assessment of Escape Routes
Risk Assessment Checklist for Emergency LightingInstallationsRisk assessment of the following parameters to provide the requiredlevel of emergency lighting when the occupants of premises evacuate inan emergency could mean the difference between life and death.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 18
Chapter 5 / 19
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Does
Not
Com
ply
11 Are the existing luminaires clean,undamaged and are all lamps intact,operational and unblackened?
9.4 6.10.2 Are luminaire housings on escaperoutes fire retardant in accordancewith BS5266?ICEL Registered products automa-tically comply, for others refer tooriginal equipment manufacturer.
9.3 9.1 Do the luminaires operate for therequired emergency duration? Theminimum duration is 1 hour, how-ever in premises where evacuationis not immediate, following a normalmains failure, 3 hours is required.Note: After fully discharging thesystem allow 24 hours to rechargebefore re-occupying the building.
9.2 6.10.1 Are the fittings sited in their correctoperating environment, e.g. fortemperature and I.P. rating?
9.3 9.2 Are the luminaires of the correctsystem type (e.g. Non maintained/maintained/combined)?
E2 Assessment of Existing Emergency Lighting –Luminaires and Escape Route Signs
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 19
20 / Chapter 5
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Does
Not
Com
ply
8 Do the sign legends comply with theHealth and Safety (Safety Signs andSignals) Regulations 1996?
6g),8 5.6,.6.9.3 Are there signs that clearly show theemergency escape routes from anyposition within the premises?
6.j),4 5.6 Are all exits marked and directionsof travel indicated?
4 6.9.3 Are the signs illuminated internallyor from an external source when thenormal lighting supply fails?
8.1 5.6 Is the size of each sign correct forthe viewing distances?
E3 Assessment of Fire Safety Signs
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 20
Chapter 5 / 21
E4 Siting of Luminaires
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Not A
pplic
able
Does
Not
Com
ply
9.1 6.7 Are the luminaires positioned atall points of emphasis –
ICEL1006
Near stairs, such that all readsreceive direct light?
ICEL1006
Near changes of level?
ICEL1006
Near each change of direction?
ICEL1006
Near each intersection ofcorridors?
ICEL1006
To illuminate Exit doors?
ICEL1006
Near each piece of fire fightingequipment or manual call point?
ICEL1006
Outside and near to each finalexit to a point of safety?
ICEL1006
Near each first aid point?
6.c),9.1
5.3.2 Are luminaires sited along thepermanently unobstructedescape routes at the correctspacings, positioned to achievethe required minimum level ofilluminance of 0.2 Lux?
6.d),9.1
5.2,5.3 +BS5266Pt7/BSEN1838
Are luminaires sited alongescape routes which maybecome obstructed, positionedto achieve a minimum level ofilluminance of 1 Lux?
6.c),9.1 5.2 +BS5266Pt7/BSEN1838
Are luminaires sited along theescape routes which may beutilized by the very young,elderly, disabled or partiallysighted, positioned to achieve a level of illuminance of at least1 Lux (possibly significantly higher, depending on the degreeof impairment?
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 21
22 / Chapter 5
E4 Siting of Luminaires (continued)
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Not A
pplic
able
Does
Not
Com
ply
6.j),9.1 5.3.3 +BS5266Pt7/BSEN1838
Are luminaires in the openareas of greater than 60 m2, atthe correct spacing to achievethe illuminance of 0.5 Lux mini-mum?
9.1 6.3 Are a minimum of 2 luminairescontributing to the emergencyillumination in each ‘lightingcompartment’ on the escaperoute, to ensure that the area isnot plunged into darkness if aluminaire fails?
Are additional luminaires provided in the following locations –
ICEL1006
6.8.3 Lift cars?
ICEL1006
6.8.5 Toilet facilities and other opentiled areas exceeding 8 m2
floor area and all toilets for thedisabled?
ICEL1006
6.8.4 Escalators?
ICEL1006
6.8.4 Motor generator, control or plantrooms?
ICEL1006
6.8.7 Covered car parks alongpedestrian routes?
ICEL1006
Near each first aid point?
6.e),7 Are high risk areas illuminatedat 10 % of normal illuminance or at least 1.5 Lux, in an emer-gency, with a response time of 0.5 seconds or less?
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 22
Chapter 5 / 23
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Section not applicable
Com
plie
s
Does
Not
Com
ply
App.D 12.4 Are the batteries being charged(indicator lamp on)?
9.4 6.10.1 Do the luminaires comply with allrelevant product standards forescape routes?
9.4 6.10.2 ICEL marked luminaires auto-matically comply. In particular ICELsignifies fire retardant housings andverified photometric data.
E5 Self-Contained Emergency Luminaires and Sign
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Section not applicable
Com
plie
s
Does
Not
Com
ply
9.6 Do the Central Power SupplySystems (Central Battery Systems)comply with prEN 50171 or does acompetent person declare thesystems are working correctly?
App.D 12.4 Is the battery charger functioningcorrectly?
E6 Central Power Supply Systems (Central Battery Systems)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 23
24 / Chapter 5
E7 Wiring of Luminaires
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Does
Not
Com
ply
App.E Has a risk assessment verificationcertificate been provided?
10 11.3 Are the entries made in the log bookcorrect?
10 3.3 Are up-to-date drawings availableand correct?
E8 Records and Documentation
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Not A
pplic
able
Does
Not
Com
ply
9 8.2.13 Are luminaires permanentlywired?
9 6.2 Are the non maintained lumin-aires fed from the same finalsub-circuit as the local lighting?(A qualified electrician can usu-ally check by removing the locallighting fuse and verifying theemergency lighting operation)
9.6 8.3.5.2. +IEE Regs
Is the volt drop to CentralBattery luminaires within 10%of the nominal voltage and areluminaires connected in fireprotected cable as defined inBS5266?
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 24
Chapter 5 / 25
E9 Routine Maintenance
ICEL1008
SectionRef
B55266Pt1Clause
Ref
Com
plie
s
Not A
pplic
able
Does
Not
Com
ply
Is a procedure in place to rectify test failures and providespares?
10 8.3.3, 12.4 Is a regime of regular testingset up?
10 12.4 Are routine tests completedaccording to the requirementsin BS5266?
App. D Central Power Supply Systems(Central Battery Systems).Where applicable, are the batte-ry electrolyte levels and specificgravities satisfactory?
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
05_LUXMATELM_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:40 Uhr Seite 25
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
The five steps of lighting design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2PANOS HF/HG 175/200/250 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3PANOS HM 175/200/250 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4PANOS LF/LG 175/200/250 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5PANOS LM 175/200/250 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6QUARTOS CQF 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS 2-/3-/4-lamp . . . . . . . 8MIREL FEC/FED 1-/4-lamp M625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9RTX II C bzw. D 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10MELLOW LIGHT IV – louvre (surface-mounted/recessed) 11MELLOW LIGHT IV – grid-mesh controller (surface-mounted/recessed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12LIGHT FIELDS recessed M625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14LIGHT FIELDS A-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15LA TRAVE KC T16 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16LA TRAVE KC T16 3-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17CLARIS MSD-ID 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18AERO USN/UGN-ID 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19OREA GZ-ID 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 EVG 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . 21TECTON(-I) + RW T16 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22TECTON(-I) + RW T16 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23TECTON-IP louvre T16 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24ZX/XR/XT 1-/2-lamp T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25COPA I 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26COPA I 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27COPA D 32/42/57/85 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28COPA D 70/150 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29COPA D 250 W QT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30COPA A-B HIT/HST 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31COPA A-B HIT/HST 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32COPA A-N HME 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33COPA A-B, A-T, A-ASY HST 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34COPA A-ASY HIT/HST 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35FZ/FT/IFP/TOL-TBC 1-lamp, 58 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36FZ/FT/IFP/TOL-TBC 1-lamp, 36 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37FZ/FT/IFP/TOL 2-lamp, 58 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38FZ/FT/IFP/TOL 2-lamp, 36 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40RAIN 1-/2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 6
Quickplan – calculating the number of luminaires required
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:43 Uhr Seite 1
The five steps of lighting design
The lighting design process can be simplified into five steps:
Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS (see chapter on “Recommended values for indoor lighting”)
SELECT lamps and luminaires(see “Lamps” and “Luminaires” chapters)
Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required(using the Quickplan graphs below)
POSITION the luminaires(axial spacing values are noted in the Quickplan diagrams)
ANALYSE the results (technical lightingfeatures, costs)(for costs see “Economic efficiency calculation” chapter)
Efficiency methodThe Quickplan graphs have been calculated using the efficiencymethod.The following formulae can be used to give an approximatefigure for the mean illuminance and the number of luminairesrequired.
Em = mean illuminance n = number of luminairesz = number of lamps per luminaire WF= maintenance factorØL = luminous flux of the lamp A = floor areaηB = utilization factor (= ηLB · ηR)ηLB = luminaire efficiencyηR = room utilization factor
– Standard UGR values and maintained luminance levels forluminance limit angle (e.g. 65° or 75°) all around theluminaire
– Correction factors for dark rooms and different ceiling heights(no. of luminaires x factor)
– Maintenance factor uses an assumed value (graphs calculatedusing MF = 0.8)
– Uniformity: max. luminaire spacing to achieve a uniformitygreater than or equal to 0.7
Em =n · z · ØL · WF · ηB
An =
Em · A
z · ØL · WF · ηB
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:43 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 6 / 3
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
Floo
r are
a m
2
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°2/
13 W
TC-
D (1
75)
17.3
17.3
< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/18
W T
C-D
(200
)17
.017
.0<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/26
W T
C-D
(250
)15
.815
.8<
200
cd/
m2
2/32
W T
C-T
(250
)16
.216
.2<
200
cd/
m2
140
130
120
110
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
PANO
S HF
/HG
175/
200/
250
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
2/13
W T
C-D
(175
)
2/18
W T
C-D
(200
)
2/26
W T
C-D
(250
)
2/32
W T
C-T
(250
)
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 2
.9 m
(2/1
3,2/
18),
up to
2.8
m (2
/26,
2/32
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:43 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
Floo
r are
a m
2
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°/75
°2/
13 W
TC-
D (1
75)
17.6
17.6
75°<
200
cd/
m2
2/18
W T
C-D
(200
)18
.618
.675
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/26
W T
C-D
(250
)16
.016
.065
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
140
130
120
110
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
PANO
S HM
175
/200
/250
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
2/13
W T
C-DE
L (1
75)
2/26
W T
C-DE
L (2
50)
2/18
W T
C-DE
L (2
00)
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 3
.1 m
/2.9
m (2
/26
W)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:43 Uhr Seite 4
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
Floo
r are
a m
2
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.75
°2/
13 W
TC-
D (1
75)
21.2
21.2
< 2
00 c
d/m
2
2/18
W T
C-D
(200
)20
.520
.5<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/26
W T
C-D
(250
)21
.721
.7<
200
cd/
m2
2/32
W T
C-T
(250
)24
.523
.5
140
130
120
110
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
PANO
S LF
/LG
175/
200/
250
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
2/13
W T
C-D
(175
)
2/18
W T
C-D
(200
)
2/26
W T
C-D
(250
)
2/32
W T
C-T
(250
)
Chapter 6 / 5
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up to
3.7
m (2
/18
W),
up to
4
m (2
/13
W,2
/26
W),
up to
4.4
m (2
/32
W)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:43 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
Floo
r are
a m
2
86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.75
°2/
13 W
TC-
DEL
(175
)20
.920
.92/
18 W
TC-
DEL
(200
)20
.720
.7<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/26
W T
C-DE
L (2
50)
22.1
22.1
2/32
W T
C-TE
L (2
50)
22.7
21.9
140
130
120
110
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
PANO
S LM
175
/200
/250
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
2/13
W T
C-DE
L (1
75)
2/18
W T
C-DE
L (2
00)
2/26
W T
C-DE
L (2
50)
2/32
W T
C-TE
L (2
50)
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 4
m (2
/13
W,2
/18
W),
up to
4.7
m (2
/26
W,2
/32
W)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:43 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 6 / 7
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
QUAR
TOS
CQF
1-/2
-lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v. 6
5°CQ
F 1/
42 W
TC-
T 17
.517
.5<
100
0 cd
/m2
CQF
2/26
W T
C-D
16.1
16.1
< 2
00 c
d/m
2
CQF
2/32
W T
C-T
18.5
18.5
< 1
000
cd/m
2
1/42
W
2/26
W
2/32
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 4
m (1
/42
W,2
/32
W),
up to
3.7
m (2
/26
W)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
MIR
AL/M
IREL
RAS
/RES
- B
WS
2-/3
-/4-
lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.RA
S/RE
S 2/
54 W
T16
16.4
19.5
RAS/
RES
3/80
W T
1614
.618
.0RA
S/RE
S 4/
54 W
T16
15.8
19.3
RAS/
RES
4/80
W T
1616
.219
.7
3/80
W
4/80
W
2/54
W
4/54
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
3.8
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 8
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
MIR
EL F
EC/F
ED 1
-/4-
lam
p M
625
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v. 6
5°FE
C 1/
54 W
T16
17.7
17.9
< 1
000
cd/m
2
FEC
2/28
W T
1616
.315
.7<
100
0 cd
/m2
FEC
2/35
W T
1614
.614
.0<
100
0 cd
/m2
FEC
2/49
W T
1615
.414
.8<
100
0 cd
/m2
FEC
4/14
W T
1616
.115
.5<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/28
W
2/49
W
1/54
W4/
14 W
2/35
W
Chapter 6 / 9
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
4.3
m(1
/54
W) o
r 4.7
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 9
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
RTX
II C
or D
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
1/35
W
1/49
W
1/54
W
2/35
W
2/54
W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v. 6
5°RT
X2 1
/35
W +
D15
.315
.8<
200
cd/
m2
RTX2
1/4
9 W
+ D
16.4
16.8
< 2
00 c
d/m
2
RTX2
1/5
4 W
+ D
17.6
18.1
< 2
00 c
d/m
2
RTX2
2/3
5 W
+ D
17.2
17.8
< 1
000
cd/m
2
RTX2
2/5
4 W
+ D
18.6
19.2
< 1
000
cd/m
2
10 / Chapter 6
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
4.3
m
1-la
mp,
up to
4 m
2-la
mp
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 6 / 11
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
MEL
LOW
LIG
HT IV
– L
ouvr
e (s
urfa
ce-m
ount
ed/r
eces
sed)
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v. 6
5°M
L IV
A A
C 2/
35 T
16
13.7
13.0
< 1
000
cd/m
2
ML
IV A
AC
2/49
T16
14.4
14.1
< 1
000
cd/m
2
ML
IV A
AC
2/54
T16
15.3
14.9
< 1
000
cd/m
2
ML
IV B
EC
1/55
TC-
L M
625
16.4
14.8
< 1
000
cd/m
2
ML
IV B
EC
2/24
T16
M62
516
.714
.7<
100
0 cd
/m2
ML
IV A
EC
2/54
T16
M62
516
.416
.2<
100
0 cd
/m2
EC 2
/24
W
EC 1
/55
W
EC 2
/54
W
AC 2
/54
W
AC 2
/49
W
AC 2
/35
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
edium
-size
d ro
om (T
16)
MF=
0.8
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
4 m
,ax
ial s
paci
ng u
p to
4.7
m (2
/24
W)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
30 25 20 15 10
5
18 15 12 9 6 3
MEL
LOW
LIG
HT IV
– G
rid-m
esh
cont
rolle
r(s
urfa
ce-m
ount
ed/r
eces
sed)
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
AB 2
/35
W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.M
L IV
A A
B 2/
35 W
T16
18
.916
.1M
L IV
A A
B 2/
49 W
T16
19.4
16.7
ML
IV A
AB
2/54
W T
1620
.317
.5M
L IV
B E
B 1/
55 W
TC-
L M
625
20.4
19.1
ML
IV B
EB
2/24
W T
16 M
625
20.0
18.6
ML
IV B
EB
2/54
W T
16 M
625
19.8
19.9
AB 2
/49
W
EB 1
/55
W
AB 2
/54
W
EB 2
/24
W
EB 2
/54
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
edium
-size
d ro
om (T
16)
MF=
0.8
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p,ax
ial s
paci
ngup
to 5
.4 m
/4.7
m (2
/54
W E
B)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 12
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
LIGH
T FI
ELDS
Rec
esse
d M
625
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°L-
FIEL
D 2/
24 W
T16
15.4
15.3
L-FI
ELD
2/28
W T
1614
.414
.365
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
L-FI
ELD
2/35
W T
1614
.514
.465
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
L-FI
ELD
4/14
W T
1614
.514
.265
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
4/14
W
2/35
W
2/24
W
2/28
W
Chapter 6 / 13
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.77
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuou
s row
spac
ing u
p to
3.7
m (2
/28
W,2/
35 W
),axia
l spa
cing u
p to 3
.4 m
(2/2
4 W,4
/14 W
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
LIGH
T FI
ELDS
Sur
face
-mou
nted
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°L-
FIEL
DS A
2/2
8 W
14
.414
.465
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
L-FI
ELDS
A 2
/35
W14
.514
.465
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
L-FI
ELDS
A 4
/14
W14
.514
.265
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/28
W
2/35
W
4/14
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.77
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuou
s ro
w sp
acing
up
to 3
.7 m
(2/2
8 W
,2/
35 W
),ax
ial s
pacin
g up
to 3
.4 m
(4/1
4 W
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 14
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
LIGH
T FI
ELDS
A-ID
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v. 6
5°L-
FIEL
DS A
-ID 2
/49
W
<13
<13
< 1
000
cd/m
2
L-FI
ELDS
A-ID
2/5
4 W
<13
<13
< 1
000
cd/m
2
L-FI
ELDS
A-ID
4/2
4 W
<13
<13
< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/54
W
4/24
W
2/49
W
Chapter 6 / 15
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.75
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuou
s ro
w sp
acing
up
to 3
.7 m
(2/4
9 W
,2/
54 W
),ax
ial s
pacin
g up
to 3
.1 m
(4/2
4 W
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
LA T
RAVE
KC
T16
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.55
°/65
°2/
35 W
T16
<13
<13
55°<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/54
W T
16<
13<
1365
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/54
W
2/35
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.75
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
3.1
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 16
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
LA T
RAVE
KC
T16
3-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.55
°/65
°3/
35 W
T16
<13
<13
55°<
100
0 cd
/m2
3/54
W T
16<
13<
1365
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
3/35
W
3/54
W
Chapter 6 / 17
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.75
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
4.2
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 17
18 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
CLAR
IS M
SD-ID
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°1/
28 W
T16
<13
<13
< 1
000
cd/m
2
1/35
W T
16<
13<
13<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/28
W T
16<
13<
13<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/35
W T
16<
13<
13<
100
0 cd
/m2
2/28
W
2/35
W
1/28
W
1/35
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.77
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
3.9
m
1-la
mp,
up to
4.4
m 2
-lam
p
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 18
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
AERO
USN
/UGN
-ID 2
-lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
2/54
W
2/28
W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°2/
28 W
T16
<13
<13
< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/54
W T
16<
13<
13<
100
0 cd
/m2
Chapter 6 / 19
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.75
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
5.6
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 19
20 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
OREA
GZ-
ID 2
-lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.2/
54 W
T16
<13
<13
2/54
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.75
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
5.6
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 20
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
SPHE
ROS
D-ID
/C-ID
T16
Ele
ctro
nic
balla
st 1
-/2-
lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°/75
°1/
35 W
T16
<13
<13
65°<
100
0 cd
/m2
1/54
W T
16<
13<
1365
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/28
W T
16<
13<
1365
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/35
W T
16<
13<
1365
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
2/54
W T
1614
.613
.575
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
1/35
W
1/54
W
2/54
W
2/28
W
2/35
W
Chapter 6 / 21
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.77
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
4.2
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 21
22 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
TECT
ON(-
I) +
RW
T16
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.TE
CTON
1/5
4 W
T16
+ R
W25
.122
.9TE
CTON
1/5
4 W
T16
+PK
+RW
25.5
20.9
TECT
ON 2
/54
W T
16 +
RW
25.8
25.0
TECT
ON-I
2/54
W T
16 +
R24
.524
.5
1/54
W+
PK
1/54
W
2/54
W-I
2/54
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.80
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Axial
spa
cing
up to
5.6
m/4
.8 m
(-I 2
/54
W +
R)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 22
Chapter 6 / 23
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
TECT
ON(-
I) +
RW
T16
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.TE
CTON
1/8
0 W
T16
+ R
W25
.423
.2TE
CTON
1/8
0 W
T16
+PK
+RW
25.8
21.2
TECT
ON 2
/80
W T
16 +
RW
26.1
25.3
TECT
ON-I
2/80
W T
16 +
R24
.824
.8
2/80
W
1/80
W
1/80
W+
PK
-I 2/
80 W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.80
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Axial
spa
cing
up to
5.6
m/4
.8 m
(-I 2
/80
W +
R)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 23
24 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
TECT
ON-IP
Lou
vre
T16
1-/2
-lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.TE
CTON
-IP 1
/54
W T
1619
.418
.8TE
CTON
-IP 1
/80
W T
1619
.719
.2TE
CTON
-IP 2
/54
W T
1621
.220
.5TE
CTON
-IP 2
/80
W T
1621
.520
.9
2/54
W
2/80
W
1/54
W
1/80
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.80
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce2
year
sRo
om m
aint
enan
ce2
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 4
.4 m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 24
Chapter 6 / 25
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
ZX/X
R/XT
1-/
2-la
mp
T26
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
1/58
W+
XR
1/58
W
2/58
W+
XR2/
58 W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ial
UGR_
trans
v.ZX
1/5
8 W
T26
26.7
22.3
ZX 2
/58
W T
2625
.819
.2ZX
1/5
8 W
T26
+ X
R23
.622
.0ZX
2/5
8 W
T26
+ X
R25
.522
.3ZX
1/5
8 W
T26
+ X
T<
13
20.3
ZX 2
/58
W T
26 +
XT
18.9
21.4
1/58
W+
XT
2/58
W+
XT
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1 fo
r(X
R,XT
)/1.2
5 fo
r (ZX
)
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.80
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
at R
h =
6 m
up
to 1
6 m
(ZX)
/14
m (X
R)/6
.5 m
(XT)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 25
26 / Chapter 6
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
COPA
I 25
0 W
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°1/
250W
HIE
RAB
190
00lm
TST
15.2
15.2
< 1
000
cd/m
2
1/25
0W H
SE R
AB 2
5000
lm T
ST16
.216
.2<
100
0 cd
/m2
1/25
0 W
HIE
1/25
0 W
HSE
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n la
rge
room
MF=0
.79 (H
IE)MF
=0.83
(HSE)
Lam
p op
erat
ion
4000
h8,
000
hCl
eanin
g of
lum
i.(IP6
5)1
year
3 ye
ars
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar3
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 5
m (T
ST)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 26
Chapter 6 / 27
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
COPA
I 40
0 W
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
1/40
0 W
HIE
1/40
0 W
HSE
*
1/40
0 W
HSE
**
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°/75
°1/
400W
HIE
RAB
360
00 lm
17.5
17.5
75°<
100
0 cd
/m2
1/40
0W H
SE R
AB 3
6000
lm*
17.6
17.4
75°<
100
0 cd
/m2
1/40
0W H
SE R
AB 4
7000
lm**
16.0
16.0
65°<
100
0 cd
/m2
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n la
rge
room
MF=0
.70 (H
IE)MF
=0.83
(HSE)
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2000
h8,
000
hCl
eanin
g of
lum
i.(IP6
5)1
year
3 ye
ars
Room
mai
nten
ance
1 ye
ar3
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 8
.3 m
*(Co
lour
rend
ition
cla
ss R
a >
60)
**(C
olou
r ren
ditio
n cl
ass
Ra >
20)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 27
28 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 4
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
° / 7
5°CO
PA D
1/3
2W R
KF/R
KID
15.1
15.1
65°<
200
cd/
m2
COPA
D 1
/42W
RKF
/RKI
D17
.317
.375
°< 2
00 c
d/m
2
COPA
D 1
/57W
RKF
23.2
23.2
COPA
D 1
/57W
RKI
D20
.520
.575
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
COPA
D 1
/85W
RKF
17.6
17.6
65°<
100
0 cd
/m2
COPA
D 1
/85W
RKI
D17
.517
.565
°< 1
000
cd/m
2
1/32
W R
KF/R
KID
1/42
W R
KF/R
KID
1/57
W R
KF/R
KID
1/85
W R
KF/R
KID
COPA
D 3
2/42
/57/
85 W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
5 m
1.2
1.1
6 m
1.4
1.2
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s (IP
65)
1 ye
arRo
om m
aint
enan
ce2
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 5
m,u
p to
5.4
m(4
2W
RKF
),up
to 5
.7 m
(42
W R
KID,
57W
RKF
,RKI
D )
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 28
Chapter 6 / 29
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
COPA
D 7
0/15
0 W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 4
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.55
°/65
°CO
PA D
1/7
0W (6
400
lm)
18.0
18.0
65° <
100
0 cd
/m2
COPA
D 1
/150
W (1
4000
lm)
20.9
20.9
75° <
100
0 cd
/m2
1/70
W H
IT
1/15
0 W
HIT
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
5 m
1.2
1.1
6 m
1.4
1.2
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=0
.77 (H
CI)La
mp
oper
atio
n2,
000
hCl
eani
ng o
f lum
inai
res
(IP65
)1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 4
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 29
30 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
COPA
D 2
50 W
QT
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 4
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.65
°CO
PA D
1/2
50 W
QT
17.8
17.8
< 1
000
cd/m
2
1/25
0 W
QT
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
5 m
1.2
1.1
6 m
1.4
1.2
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.76
Lam
p op
erat
ion
1,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s (IP
65)
1 ye
arRo
om m
aint
enan
ce2
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 4
.5 m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 30
Chapter 6 / 31
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
COPA
A-B
HIT
/HST
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
1/25
0 W
HIT
2/25
0 W
HIT
1/25
0 W
HST
2/25
0 W
HST
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mUG
R_ax
ial
UGR_
tran
sv.
COPA
A-B
1/2
50W
HIT
(20
000
lm)
25.8
25.1
COPA
A-B
1/2
50W
HST
(23
000
lm)
26.6
25.6
COPA
A-B
2/2
50W
HIT
(40
000
lm)
27.3
27.3
COPA
A-B
1/2
50W
HST
(46
000
lm)
22.6
31.6
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n lar
ge ro
omMF
=0.80
(HIT)
MF=0
.81 (H
ST)La
mp
oper
atio
n2,
000
h14
,000
hCl
eanin
g of
lum
i.(IP6
5)1
year
1 ye
arRo
om m
aint
enan
ce2
year
s2
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up to
:7,5
m H
ST,u
p to
8.3
m2/
250
W H
IT,up
to 9
m 1
/250
W H
IT
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 31
32 / Chapter 6
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
COPA
A-B
HIT
/HST
1-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mUG
R_ax
ial
UGR_
tran
sv.
COPA
A_B
1/4
00 W
HIT
(320
00 lm
) *25
.825
.1CO
PA A
_B 1
/400
W H
ST (4
8000
lm) *
*26
.625
.6
1/40
0 W
HST
1/40
0 W
HIT
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n la
rge
room
MF=0
.67 (H
IT)MF
=0.81
(HST)
Lam
p op
erat
ion
1,00
0 h
14,0
00 h
Clea
ning
of lu
mi.(
IP65)
1 ye
ar1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 9
m
*(Co
lour
rend
ition
cla
ss R
a >
90)
**(C
olou
r ren
ditio
n cl
ass
Ra >
20)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 32
Chapter 6 / 33
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
COPA
A-N
HM
E 1-
lam
pX=
4H Y
=8H
/ S=
0.25
H / R
efle
ctio
n fa
ctor
s 70
/50/
20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mUG
R_ax
ial
UGR_
tran
sv.
COPA
A_B
1/2
50 W
HM
E (1
3000
lm)
27.0
25.2
COPA
A_B
1/4
00 W
HM
E (2
2000
lm)
29.0
27.7
1/25
0 W
HM
E
1/40
0 W
HM
E
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n la
rge
room
MF=
0.80
Lam
p op
erat
ion
2,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s (IP
65)
1 ye
arRo
om m
aint
enan
ce2
year
s
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 9
m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 33
34 / Chapter 6
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
10 8 6 4 2
6 5 4 3 2 1
COPA
A-B
, A-T
, A-A
SY H
ST 1
-lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
A-B
1/60
0 W
HST
A-AS
Y 1/
600
W H
ST
A-T
1/60
0 W
HST
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mUG
R_ax
ial
UGR_
tran
sv.
COPA
A-B
1/6
00 W
HST
32
.731
.2CO
PA A
-T 1
/600
W H
ST
22.6
27.7
COPA
ASY
1/6
00 W
HST
-
-
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n la
rge
room
MF=
0.83
Lam
p op
erat
ion
10,0
00 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s (IP
65)
2 ye
ars
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 6
.3 m
(ASY
),up
to
7.5
m (A
-B)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 34
Chapter 6 / 35
5010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
0
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
COPA
A-A
SY H
IT/H
ST 1
-lam
p50
0 lx
300
lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
1/25
0 W
HIT 1/
400
W H
ST1/40
0 W
HIT
1/25
0 W
HST
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 6
mCO
PA A
-ASY
1/2
50 W
HIT
(200
00 lm
)CO
PA A
-ASY
1/2
50 W
HST
(270
00 lm
)CO
PA A
-ASY
1/4
00 W
HIT
(320
00 lm
)CO
PA A
-ASY
1/4
00 W
HST
(480
00 lm
)
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.1
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n la
rge
room
MF=0
.81 (H
ST)
Lam
p op
erat
ion
14,0
00 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s (IP
65)
2 ye
ars
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 35
36 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
FZ/F
T/IF
P/TO
L-TB
C 1-
lam
p, 3
6 W
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
FT 1
/36
WFZ 1
/36
WIFP
1/36
W
TOL-
TBC
1/36
W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.FZ
1/3
6W T
2622
.017
.3FT
1/3
6W T
2619
.415
.2IF
P 1/
36W
T26
22.7
18.4
TOL
1/36
W T
26 T
BC19
.819
.5
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/4
0/20
):1.2
5 (1.
1 for
TOL-
TBC)
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
5.8
m (T
OL-
TBC)
,7.8
m (I
FP-P
C) o
r 8.5
m (F
Z,FT
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 36
Chapter 6 / 37
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
FZ/F
T/IF
P/TO
L-TB
C 1-
lam
p, 5
8 W
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.FZ
1/5
8W T
2622
.818
.1FT
1/5
8W T
2620
.216
.0IF
P-PC
1/5
8W T
2623
.519
.2TO
L 1/
58W
T26
TBC
21.2
20.6
FZ ·
FT
TOL-
TBC
IFP-
PC
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/4
0/20
):1.2
5 (1.
1 for
TOL-
TBC)
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
5.8
m (T
OL-
TBC)
,7.8
m (I
FP-P
C) o
r 8.5
m (F
Z,FT
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 37
38 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
FZ/F
T/IF
P/TO
L 2-
lam
p, 3
6 W
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.FZ
2/3
6W T
2623
.218
.6FT
2/3
6W T
2620
.816
.8IF
P 2/
36W
T26
24.1
19.5
TOL
2/36
W T
26 T
BC19
.819
.5
FT 2
/36
W
FZ 2
/36
W
IFP
2/36
W
TOL
2/36
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/4
0/20
):1.2
5 (1.
1 for
TOL-
TBC)
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
5.8
m (T
OL-
TBC)
,7.4
m (I
FP-P
C) o
r 7.9
m (F
Z,FT
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 38
Chapter 6 / 39
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
30 25 20 15 10 5
18 15 12 9 6 3
FZ/F
T/IF
P/TO
L 2-
lam
p, 5
8 W
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.FZ
2/5
8W T
2624
.019
.4FT
2/5
8W T
2621
.617
.6IF
P 2/
58W
T26
24.9
20.3
TOL
2/58
W T
26 T
BC21
.220
.6
FT 2
/58
W
FZ 2
/58
WIFP
2/58
W
TOL
2/58
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/4
0/20
):1.2
5 (1.
1 for
TOL-
TBC)
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
5.8
m (T
OL-
TBC)
,7.4
m (I
FP-P
C) o
r 7.9
m (F
Z,FT
)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 39
40 / Chapter 6
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
CHIA
RO F
TR39
0/FT
R680
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
1/40
W1/
55 W
22+
40 W
2/40
W
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
RCei
ling
heig
ht: 3
mUG
R_ax
ial
UGR_
trans
v.FT
R 1/
40W
T16
-R20
.320
.3FT
R 1/
55W
T16
-R20
.720
.7FT
R 1/
22W
+40
W T
16-R
20.6
20.6
FTR
2/40
W T
16-R
19.8
19.4
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.76
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Lum
inai
re m
aint
enan
ce1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Axia
l spa
cing
up
to 4
.5 m
,up
to
5 m
2/4
0W
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 40
Chapter 6 / 41
2040
6080
100
120
140
160
180
200
60 50 40 30 20 10
36 30 24 18 12 6
RAIN
1-/
2-la
mp
500
lx30
0 lx
Floo
r are
a m
2
X=4H
Y=
8H /
S=0.
25H
/ Ref
lect
ion
fact
ors
70/5
0/20
Ceili
ng h
eigh
t: 3
mUG
R_ax
ialU
GR_t
rans
v.RA
IN 1
/58
W T
26
26.3
21.3
RAIN
1/8
0 W
T 1
628
.724
.2RA
IN 2
/36
W T
26
25.2
19.2
RAIN
2/5
4 W
T 1
628
.421
.8
1/58
W
1/80
W
2/54
W
2/36
W
Corr
ectio
n fa
ctor
s•
Dark
room
(50/
40/2
0):1
.25
• Ce
iling
Floo
r are
ahe
ight
up to
50
m2
over
50
m2
4 m
1.2
1.1
5 m
1.4
1.2
6 m
1.6
1.3
Mai
nten
ance
fact
or (M
F)
Clea
n m
ediu
m-s
ized
room
MF=
0.78
Lam
p op
erat
ion
6,00
0 h
Clea
ning
of l
umin
aire
s1
year
Room
mai
nten
ance
2 ye
ars
Unifo
rmity
Cont
inuo
us ro
w s
paci
ng u
p to
8 m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
06_QUICKPLAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:44 Uhr Seite 41
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 7
Lighting refurbishment
Arguments for refurbishing lighting systems . . . . . . . . 3 – 4Collecting data for lighting refurbishment . . . . . . . . . . 5Illuminance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Data-collection sheet for lighting refurbishment . . . . . . 6 – 17
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 1
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 7 / 3
Arguments for refurbishing lighting systems1. Reduced operating costs
1.1. Energy savings
– Efficiency of the luminaires improved from about 35 % to morethan 80 % (e.g. opal diffuser luminaire to louvre luminaire)
– Lower power consumption of ballasts
Energy audit for 58 W fluorescent lamps
Lamp diameter 38 mm 26 mm 26 mm 26 mmBallast convent. convent. low-loss electronicLamp power 65 W 58 W 58 W 50 WDissipated power 12 W 12 W 8 W 5 WTotal power 77 W 70 W 66 W 55 WExtra power consumption 40 % 27 % 20 %
Energy audit for 36 W fluorescent lamps
Lamp diameter 38 mm 26 mm 26 mm 26 mmBallast convent. convent. low-loss electronicLamp power 40 W 36 W 36 W 32 WDissipated power 9 W 9 W 6 W 4 WTotal power 49 W 45 W 42 W 36 WExtra power consumption 36 % 25 % 17 %
– Using available daylight: potential energy savings of up to 70 %
– Blinds control: prevents buildings getting too hot
– Air-conditioned rooms: a reduction in the connected load meansa reduction in heat load and hence less air-conditioning power(The heat load generated by a light output of 1 kW requiresabout 3 kW of cooling power)
1.2. Savings in lamp replacement costs
– The lamp lifetime of fluorescent lamps is extended by morethan 50 % when operated with an electronic ballast (to 16,000 – 20,000 h)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 7
1.3. Savings in maintenance costs
– No need to buy a starter when using electronic ballasts
– Modular design of luminaires and tool-free installation make it easier and hence cheaper to replace components
– No more spare-parts problems, so lower maintenance costs(motto: complete refurbishment better than constant repairs)
2. Improved ergonomics
Applying ergonomic principles to lighting brings the followingproven benefits:
– Growth in output
– Fewer mistakes and lower stoppage rates
– Reduced number of accidents
The lower thermal load of refurbished lighting systems producesa more pleasant room environment, improved working conditionsand thus a greater willingness to work.
3. Reliability and safety
– Do the luminaires meet the electrotechnical requirements (e.g. ENEC mark of conformity)?
– Do the luminaires comply with stipulated safety measures andrequirements in the room (IP XX, FF/D, Ex)?
– Does the lighting meet photometric requirements (e.g. lightinglevel, glare limitation, etc.)?
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 7 / 5
Collecting data for the lighting refurbishment
The data-collection sheets help you to compile all the relevantinformation for making an inventory of your existing lightingsystems.They provide a basis for a photometric comparison and systemcosting.
Illuminance measurement
The average illuminance is the arithmetic mean of the pointilluminance levels measured in a defined grid using a luxmeterunder precisely defined conditions.
Meters: designation and accuracy
– L: highest accuracy; 3 % limit of error– A: high accuracy; 5 % limit of error– B: moderate accuracy; 10 % limit of error (minimum
requirement)
Measurement conditions
– Avoid daylight/light from other sources (measure separatelyand deduct)
– Check mains voltage and ambient temperature– Use new, suitably aged lamps (discharge lamps 100 h)
Measurement grid and measurement height
– Workplaces = 0.75 m, sports facilities = 1.0 m– Thoroughfares, stairs, indoor car parks = 0.03 m– Cylindrical illuminance = 1.2 m– Measurement grid: coincident rectangles; separation about 1 m– Measurement grid not coincident with luminaire position grid
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 7
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type A
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total connected load in kW
ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 7 / 7
Room length Reflection:Wall %
Room width Ceiling %
Room height Floor %
EminUniformity u = Emean
=
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Cleaning per luminaire/year
Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
Costs
Room sketch:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 7
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type A
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total connected load in kW
ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 7 / 9
Room length Reflection:Wall %
Room width Ceiling %
Room height Floor %
EminUniformity u = Emean
=
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Cleaning per luminaire/year
Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
Costs
Room sketch:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 7
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type A
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total connected load in kW
ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 7 / 11
Room length Reflection:Wall %
Room width Ceiling %
Room height Floor %
EminUniformity u = Emean
=
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Cleaning per luminaire/year
Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
Costs
Room sketch:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 7
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type A
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total connected load in kW
ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 12
Chapter 7 / 13
Room length Reflection:Wall %
Room width Ceiling %
Room height Floor %
EminUniformity u = Emean
=
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Cleaning per luminaire/year
Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
Costs
Room sketch:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 7
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type A
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total connected load in kW
ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 14
Chapter 7 / 15
Room length Reflection:Wall %
Room width Ceiling %
Room height Floor %
EminUniformity u = Emean
=
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Cleaning per luminaire/year
Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
Costs
Room sketch:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 7
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type A
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total connected load in kW
ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh
Annual savings
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 16
Chapter 7 / 17
Room length Reflection:Wall %
Room width Ceiling %
Room height Floor %
EminUniformity u = Emean
=
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Old system Option 1 Option 2
Cleaning per luminaire/year
Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
Costs
Room sketch:
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
07_BELSAN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:46 Uhr Seite 17
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 8
Economic efficiency calculation
Economic efficiency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Maintenance of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Table for lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF)and lamp survival factor (LSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) . . . . . . . 5Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) . . . 6Table of burning hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Economic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 13
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 1
Economic efficiency calculation
A short pay-back period is usually the most important consider-ation when designing lighting systems.The pay-back period calculation using the following forms isbased on a static calculation method. This is a theoreticalapproach that delivers a guide value very quickly and isperfectly adequate for an initial estimate.Dynamic calculation models involving depreciation and interestpayments are left to the financial experts and fall outside thescope of this handbook.
Static calculation model
Pay-back time = Extra expenditure Investment costs
Annual saving in operating costs
Definition of terms used in the economic analysis sheetson page 8 onwards
(3) System power of luminaire Lamp wattage + power dissi-pation in control gear.(5) Annual burning hours Total of the daily lamp ON hours overthe year. The table of burning hours (page 7) provides help fordaylight-dependent systems.(13) Maintenance factor A reference maintenance factor of0.67 can be assumed (3-year maintenance interval, cleanenvironment). The system-specific maintenance factor must befound in order to calculate the number of luminaires required.It is given by the product of lamp lumens maintenance factor,lamp survival factor, luminaire maintenance factor and roomsurface maintenance factor. These factors can be found fromthe tables on pages 3–7. The maintenance factor must bedocumented in the design process together with the basicconditions.(18) Cost of lamp replacement Cost of complete job ofreplacing the lamps, including the costs of the lamp andadditional costs such as step ladders, weekend overtimepayments or loss of production.(19) Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of the complete job ofcleaning the luminaire plus replacing faulty components in the lighting system including parts costs.(20) Cost of room cleaning Labour costs for cleaning roomsurfaces and restoring the reflection characteristics to their new condition.(21) Energy costs per kWh Estimate a mixed price for high andlow tariff. Include energy standing charges in the working price.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 2
160 %
140 %
120 %
100 %
80 %
60 %
40 %
20 %0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
years
Environmental conditions
Maintenance of lighting systems
Environment Max. maintenance Work areastype intervalClean (C) 3 years Clean rooms, computer
centres, electronic-component assembly areas, hospitals*)
Normal (N) 2 years Offices, shops, schools,laboratories, restaurants,warehouses, assembly bays
Dirty (D) 1 year Steel works, chemical plants,foundries, welding shops,grinding shops, woodworking
*) Sometimes shorter maintenance intervals are required for hygienereasons.
From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lightingsystems”, dated 1995, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8
The following table contains the recommended maximummaintenance interval for the type of environment.
Chapter 8 / 3
Example:Luminaire maintenance: every yearRoom surface maintenance: every 3 yearsLamp replacement: every 3 yearsFaulty lamp replacement: immediately
Maintenance factor (MF) = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RSMF (see factor tables on the following pages)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 3
4 / Chapter 8
Table for lamp lumens maintenance factor(LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF)
LLM
F bu
rnin
g ho
urs
100
500
1,00
01,
500
2,00
04,
000
6,00
08,
000
10,0
0012
,000
14,0
0016
,000
18,0
0020
,000
Inca
ndes
cent
lam
pLL
MF
1.00
0.97
0.93
0.89
CIE
1997
LSF
1.00
0.98
0.50
0.03
Low
-vol
tage
hal
ogen
lam
pLL
MF
1.00
0.99
0.98
0.97
0.95
Philip
s Ca
psul
ine
Pro
LSF
1.00
0.99
0.91
0.84
0.50
Sing
le-p
hosp
hor f
luor
esce
nt la
mp
LLM
F1.
000.
970.
940.
910.
890.
830.
800.
780.
760.
740.
720.
70CI
E 19
97LS
F1.
001.
001.
001.
001.
001.
000.
990.
950.
850.
750.
640.
50Tr
ipho
spho
r flu
ores
cent
lam
p T2
6LL
MF
1.00
0.97
0.96
0.95
0.94
0.92
0.92
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.88
Osra
m L
UMIL
UXLS
F1.
000.
990.
990.
980.
980.
980.
980.
970.
960.
900.
50Tr
ipho
spho
r flu
ores
cent
lam
p T1
6LL
MF
1.00
0.96
0.95
0.94
0.93
0.92
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.88
0.88
Osra
m F
H,FQ
LSF
1.00
0.99
0.98
0.97
0.96
0.96
0.95
0.94
0.90
0.80
0.50
Com
pact
fluo
resc
ent l
amp
LLM
F1.
000.
970.
920.
880.
850.
830.
83Os
ram
DUL
UXLS
F1.
000.
990.
990.
980.
980.
940.
50M
etal
hal
ide
lam
p Ce
ram
icLL
MF
1.00
0.94
0.89
0.85
0.80
Osra
m H
CI-1
50 W
/WDL
LSF
1.00
0.96
0.91
0.88
0.84
Met
al h
alid
e la
mp
Quar
tzLL
MF
1.00
0.93
0.88
0.83
0.80
0.76
0.74
Osra
m H
QI-E
250
W/D
LSF
1.00
0.99
0.97
0.93
0.89
0.80
0.72
Met
al h
alid
e la
mp
Quar
tzLL
MF
1.00
0.78
0.70
0.65
0.62
0.60
0.58
Osra
m H
QI-E
400
W/D
LSF
1.00
0.98
0.94
0.90
0.85
0.78
0.72
Mer
cury
vap
our l
amp
LLM
F1.
000.
900.
800.
770.
750.
730.
72Ph
ilips
HPL
250/
400
WLS
F1.
000.
990.
980.
960.
930.
880.
83So
dium
vap
our l
amp
LLM
F1.
001.
001.
000.
990.
990.
980.
980.
970.
970.
960.
960.
950.
950.
94Ph
ilips
SON(
-T) P
IA P
lus
100–
400
WLS
F1.
001.
001.
001.
001.
001.
001.
000.
990.
980.
970.
960.
930.
910.
88M
anuf
actu
rers
’ fig
ures
from
Apr
il 20
03.A
ssum
es th
e us
e of
the
late
st b
alla
st te
chno
logy
.Fo
r oth
er m
anuf
actu
rers
or l
amp
type
s,pl
ease
con
tact
rele
vant
lam
p m
anuf
actu
rer.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 8 / 5
Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)Lu
min
aire
cle
anin
g in
terv
alin
yea
rs0.
51.
01.
52.
02.
53.
0En
viro
nmen
t typ
eC
ND
CN
DS
ND
CN
DC
ND
CN
D Lu
min
aire
type
Bare
bat
ten
lum
inai
res
0.95
0.92
0.88
0.93
0.89
0.83
0.91
0.87
0.80
0.89
0.84
0.78
0.87
0.82
0.75
0.85
0.79
0.73
Refle
ctor
exp
osed
abo
ve0.
950.
910.
880.
900.
860.
830.
870.
830.
790.
840.
800.
750.
820.
760.
710.
790.
740.
68(s
elf-
clea
ning
effe
ct)
Refle
ctor
enc
lose
d ab
ove
0.93
0.89
0.83
0.89
0.81
0.72
0.84
0.74
0.64
0.80
0.69
0.59
0.77
0.64
0.54
0.74
0.61
0.52
(no
self-
clea
ning
effe
ct)
Encl
osed
IP2X
0.92
0.87
0.83
0.88
0.82
0.77
0.85
0.79
0.73
0.83
0.77
0.71
0.81
0.75
0.68
0.79
0.73
0.65
Dust
-pro
of IP
5X0.
960.
930.
910.
940.
900.
860.
920.
880.
830.
910.
860.
810.
900.
850.
800.
900.
840.
79
Indi
rect
lum
inai
res
0.92
0.89
0.85
0.86
0.81
0.74
0.81
0.73
0.65
0.77
0.66
0.57
0.73
0.60
0.51
0.70
0.55
0.45
From
CIE
pub
licat
ion
97 “
Mai
nten
ance
of i
ndoo
r ele
ctric
ligh
ting
syst
ems”
,dat
ed 1
995,
ISBN
3 9
00 7
34 3
4 8
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 8
Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)
Room
cle
anin
g in
terv
al
in y
ears
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
Envi
ronm
ent t
ype
CN
DC
ND
CN
DC
ND
CN
DC
ND
Room
siz
e/Ill
umin
atio
nRo
om in
dex
type
Smal
l Di
rect
0.97
0.96
0.95
0.97
0.94
0.93
0.96
0.94
0.92
0.95
0.93
0.90
0.94
0.92
0.89
0.94
0.92
0.88
K=
0.7
Dire
ct/In
dire
ct0.
940.
880.
840.
900.
860.
820.
890.
830.
800.
870.
820.
780.
850.
800.
750.
840.
790.
74In
dire
ct0.
900.
840.
800.
850.
780.
730.
830.
750.
690.
810.
730.
660.
770.
700.
620.
750.
680.
59
Med
ium
Dire
ct0.
980.
970.
960.
980.
960.
950.
970.
960.
950.
960.
950.
940.
960.
950.
940.
960.
950.
94K
=2.
5Di
rect
/Indi
rect
0.95
0.90
0.86
0.92
0.88
0.85
0.90
0.86
0.83
0.89
0.85
0.81
0.87
0.84
0.79
0.86
0.82
0.78
Indi
rect
0.92
0.87
0.83
0.88
0.82
0.77
0.86
0.79
0.74
0.84
0.77
0.70
0.81
0.74
0.67
0.78
0.72
0.64
Larg
eDi
rect
0.99
0.97
0.96
0.98
0.96
0.95
0.97
0.96
0.93
0.96
0.95
0.94
0.96
0.95
0.94
0.96
0.95
0.94
K=
5.0
Dire
ct/In
dire
ct0.
950.
900.
860.
940.
880.
850.
900.
860.
830.
890.
850.
810.
870.
840.
790.
860.
820.
78In
dire
ct0.
920.
870.
830.
880.
820.
770.
860.
790.
740.
840.
770.
700.
810.
740.
680.
780.
720.
65Fr
om C
IE p
ublic
atio
n 97
“M
aint
enan
ce o
f ind
oor e
lect
ric li
ghtin
g sy
stem
s”,d
ated
199
5,IS
BN 3
900
734
34
8
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 8 / 7
Table of burning hoursW
orki
ng m
ode/
shift
type
On p
erio
dDa
ylig
ht-d
epen
dent
con
trol
Burn
ing
hour
s pe
r lam
p an
d ye
arDa
ys in
use
/yea
rHo
urs/
day
1,00
0 ho
urs
24-h
shi
ft w
orki
ng,
365
24No
8.76
Proc
ess
mon
itorin
g/co
ntro
l36
524
Yes
7.30
Doub
le s
hift,
310
16No
4.96
6 da
ys/w
eek
310
16Ye
s3.
72
Sing
le s
hift,
310
10No
3.10
6 da
ys/w
eek
310
10Ye
s1.
76
Sing
le s
hift,
258
10No
2.58
5 da
ys/w
eek
258
10Ye
s1.
55
Dayli
ght-
depe
nden
t con
trol:
the
lam
ps s
witc
h on
aut
omat
ical
ly w
hen
ther
e is
too
little
day
light
ava
ilabl
e.Da
ta is
bas
ed o
n th
e as
sum
ptio
n th
at th
ere
is s
uffic
ient
ava
ilabl
e da
yligh
t for
hal
f the
yea
r.
From
CIE
pub
licat
ion
97 “
Mai
nten
ance
of i
ndoo
r ele
ctric
ligh
ting
syst
ems”
,dat
ed 1
995,
ISBN
3 9
00 7
34 3
4 8
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 8
Economic analysis
Building project
Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type (1)
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)
System power of luminaire (W) (3)
Operating data
Service life of system (y) (4)
Annual burning hours see page 7 (5)
Lamp replacement interval (y) (6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (y) (7)
Room cleaning interval (y) (8)
Number of luminaires
Lamp lumens maintenance factor see page 4 (9)
Lamp survival factor see page 4 (10)
Luminaire maintenance factor see page 5 (11)
Room surface maintenance factor see page 6 (12)
Maintenance factor (9) x (10) x (11) x (12) (13)
Number of luminaires (14)
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire (15)
Cost of one lamp (16)
Installation costs per luminaire (17)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 8
Chapter 8 / 9
Option 1 Option 2
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement (18)
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)
Cost of room cleaning (20)
Energy costs per kWh (21)
Investment costs
Luminaire costs (14) x (15) (22)
Lamp costs (14) x (2) x (16) (23)
Installation costs (14) x (17) (24)
Investment costs (22) + (23) + (24) (25)
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs (20) x (4) (8) (26)
Luminaire cleaning costs (19) x (4) (7) (27)
Lamp replacement costs (18) x (4) (6) (28)
Energy costs (14) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (21) 1000 (29)
Operating costs (26) + (27) + (28) + (29) (30)
Annual operating costs (30) (4) (31)
Pay-back period* =(25) Option 2 – (25) Option 1
= years(31) Option 1 – (31) Option 2
Pay-back period* =–
= years–
* excludes depreciation and interest
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 8
Economic analysis
Building project
Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type (1)
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)
System power of luminaire (W) (3)
Operating data
Service life of system (y) (4)
Annual burning hours see page 7 (5)
Lamp replacement interval (y) (6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (y) (7)
Room cleaning interval (y) (8)
Number of luminaires
Lamp lumens maintenance factor see page 4 (9)
Lamp survival factor see page 4 (10)
Luminaire maintenance factor see page 5 (11)
Room surface maintenance factor see page 6 (12)
Maintenance factor (9) x (10) x (11) x (12) (13)
Number of luminaires (14)
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire (15)
Cost of one lamp (16)
Installation costs per luminaire (17)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 8 / 11
Option 1 Option 2
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement (18)
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)
Cost of room cleaning (20)
Energy costs per kWh (21)
Investment costs
Luminaire costs (14) x (15) (22)
Lamp costs (14) x (2) x (16) (23)
Installation costs (14) x (17) (24)
Investment costs (22) + (23) + (24) (25)
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs (20) x (4) (8) (26)
Luminaire cleaning costs (19) x (4) (7) (27)
Lamp replacement costs (18) x (4) (6) (28)
Energy costs (14) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (21) 1000 (29)
Operating costs (26) + (27) + (28) + (29) (30)
Annual operating costs (30) (4) (31)
Pay-back period* =(25) Option 2 – (25) Option 1
= years(31) Option 1 – (31) Option 2
Pay-back period* =–
= years–
* excludes depreciation and interest
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 8
Economic analysis
Building project
Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type (1)
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)
System power of luminaire (W) (3)
Operating data
Service life of system (y) (4)
Annual burning hours see page 7 (5)
Lamp replacement interval (y) (6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (y) (7)
Room cleaning interval (y) (8)
Number of luminaires
Lamp lumens maintenance factor see page 4 (9)
Lamp survival factor see page 4 (10)
Luminaire maintenance factor see page 5 (11)
Room surface maintenance factor see page 6 (12)
Maintenance factor (9) x (10) x (11) x (12) (13)
Number of luminaires (14)
Itemised investment costs
Cost of one luminaire (15)
Cost of one lamp (16)
Installation costs per luminaire (17)
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 12
Chapter 8 / 13
Option 1 Option 2
Itemised operating costs
Cost of lamp replacement (18)
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)
Cost of room cleaning (20)
Energy costs per kWh (21)
Investment costs
Luminaire costs (14) x (15) (22)
Lamp costs (14) x (2) x (16) (23)
Installation costs (14) x (17) (24)
Investment costs (22) + (23) + (24) (25)
Operating costs
Room cleaning costs (20) x (4) (8) (26)
Luminaire cleaning costs (19) x (4) (7) (27)
Lamp replacement costs (18) x (4) (6) (28)
Energy costs (14) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (21) 1000 (29)
Operating costs (26) + (27) + (28) + (29) (30)
Annual operating costs (30) (4) (31)
Pay-back period* =(25) Option 2 – (25) Option 1
= years(31) Option 1 – (31) Option 2
Pay-back period* =–
= years–
* excludes depreciation and interest
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
08_WIRTSCHAF_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:48 Uhr Seite 13
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
“Ceiling Brightness Impression” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ceiling Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Luminance Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Protection classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 – 7Fire protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 – 9Chemical effects on materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 12Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits . . . . . . . 13 – 20Low-voltage installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 – 23
Chapter 9
Technical information
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 1
“Ceiling Brightness Impression”
The LG3 criteria have always required that the ceiling is rela-tively well illuminated, but under the “Category System” forDownlighters, the market defaulted to luminaire selection withno emphasis on other qualitative criteria.
The LG3 Addendum solved this by banning the Category Systemand setting a target for illuminating the ceiling to at least 30 %of the task illuminance. The use of an illuminance ratio in lux onthe ceiling is crude but easy to calculate, however difficult tomeasure.
The intention is unequivocal: To maintain the brightness of theceiling within certain limits to avoid the so called cave effect.Zumtobel Staff recognise that many luminaire types, especiallythose with Dual Components that emit some light at highangles, actually in themselves contribute to the BrightnessImpression.
In consequence we have developed an application programmethat can calculate the CBI – Ceiling Brightness Impression forany luminaire (of any manufacture).
The CBI application uses the algorithms from the standard GlareCalculation and the output data is presented for each luminairetype for crosswise and endwise viewing. The basis of the calcu-lation is to take notional room sizes in ratios of “h” value just asthe Glare calculation. Then for a regular array of luminaires itfirst calculates for varying room reflectance the illuminance onthe ceiling. It converts this to brightness. Then it takes each lu-minaire and calculates the brightness subtended at the viewerseye. This is weighted by the solid angle so distance and eleva-tion is accounted for. Any luminaires proximate to the viewerthat exceed 2,000 cd/m2 are excluded, as these are consideredto be glaring and not contributing to the overall brightness im-pression.
A typical luminaire CBI chart is shown below, for a Mellow IVRecessed luminaire. As would be known such a luminaire wouldonly achieve about 20 % task illuminance on the ceiling, butwhen you account for the additive effect of luminaires in thespace the overall brightness average calculate back to lux equi-valency, easily achieves a CBI or Ceiling Brightness Impressionexceeding 30.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 9 / 3
Ceiling Illuminance
Surface Dual ComponentLuminaries– Directly illuminate ceiling and
walls– Provide measureable bright-
ness– Provide increased
brightness impression
Fully recessed DualComponent Luminaires– Directly illuminate walls– Do not directly illuminate
ceiling– Create apparent brightness– Provide increased
brightness impression
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 3
L max
(cd/
m2 )
posi
tive
Type
Mak
e an
d M
odel
Date
of m
nfr.
Clas
s
9500
CRT
LG F
latro
n 91
5FT
Plus
Dec-
02I
4900
FDP
Noki
a 50
0Xa
15"
FDP
Jun-
99I
4400
FPD
Com
paq
TFT
5005
15"
FPD
Oct-
00I
3800
FPD
LG F
latro
n LC
D 57
5 M
S 15
" FP
DNo
v-00
I37
00 F
PDNE
C M
ultis
ync
LCD1
760N
XAp
r-03
I37
00 C
RTSa
msu
ng S
yncm
aste
r 700
IFT
17"
CRT
Nov-
99I
3500
FPD
NEC
Mul
tisyn
c 18
10X
Oct-
9935
00 F
PDNo
cia
Pro
800+
18"
FPD
Oct-
99I
3200
FPD
Dell
Ultra
shar
p 15
04FP
Nov-
02I
3100
CRT
Ilyam
a LS
902U
T Vi
sion
mas
ter 1
451
Feb-
02I
2700
FPD
Ilyam
a TX
A 38
13M
T 15
" FP
DFe
b-02
I22
00 C
RTCo
mpa
q 75
00 P
E116
3TFe
b-02
I20
00 L
APTO
P 1
Tosh
iba
Tecr
a 80
00 L
APTO
PJa
n-99
I19
00 F
PDSa
msu
ng S
yncm
aste
r 700
TFT
17"
FP
Feb-
99I
1800
FPD
LGSt
udio
wor
ks 5
000
LC 1
5" F
PDFe
b-99
ILG
3 Li
mit
1700
FPD
Sam
sung
15"
FPD
Dec-
99I
1,50
0 cd
/m2
1400
FPD
LG S
tudi
owor
ks 8
80 L
C 18
" FP
DDe
c-99
I14
00 C
RTDe
ll D8
28L
14"
CRT
Dec-
97II
1300
CRT
Sam
sung
Syn
cmas
ter 7
53s
Oct-
01I
1200
CRT
Sam
sung
Syn
cmas
er 5
50s
15"
CRT
Oct-
01I
900
CRT
AOC
4NLR
14"
CRT
Jan-
95I
Luminance LimitModern computer screens are increasingly tolerant to reflections.BS EN 29241-7 Ergonomic requirements for office work with visual display terminals.
Incr
easi
ngto
lera
nce
to re
flect
ions
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
4 / Chapter 9
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 9 / 5
Protection classesZumtobel Staff luminaires are classified into the followingprotection classes – a measure intended to afford protec-tion against electric shock.
Class I luminairesClass I is not identified by a symbol; the luminaire is in-tended to be connected to a protective earth conductorwhich bears the mark. Most Zumtobel Staff luminairesare designed in accordance with protection class I unlessotherwise stated.
Class II luminairesClass II luminaires have total insulation but no protectiveearth terminal. The Zumtobel Staff range includes protec-tion class II luminaires, for instance moisture-proof battenluminaires and moisture-proof diffuser luminaires.
Class III luminairesClass III identifies luminaires that are intended for operationwith a protective extra low voltage (50 V max.).Zumtobel Staff architectural luminaires include class IIIluminaires, e.g. PRIO low-voltage spotlights.
Degrees of protectionDegrees of protection indicate the following properties of equipment:
– The quality of its protection against direct contact– Its sealing against ingress of solid foreign bodies
(dust, stones, sand, etc.)– Its sealing against the ingress of water
Protection class I
Protection class II
Protection class III
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 5
6 / Chapter 9
Degrees of protection for technical luminaires
Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies as perfirst digit
IP 0X Unprotected against ingress of solid foreign bodiesIP 1X Protection against solid bodies > 50 mmIP 2X Protection against solid bodies > 12 mmIP 3X Protection against solid bodies > 2.5 mmIP 4X Protection against solid bodies > 1 mmIP 5X Dust-protected (limited ingress of dust)IP 6X Dust-tight (no ingress of dust)
Protection against moisture as per second digit
IP X0 No special protectionIP X1 Drip-proof – protection against water dropsIP X2 Protection against water drops up to 15º from the verticalIP X3 Rainproof – protection against spray water up to 60ºIP X4 Splash-proof – protection against spray water from all
directionsIP X5 Jet-proof – protection against jets of waterIP X6 Protection against heavy seas (conditions on ship decks)IP X7 Watertight – protection against immersion (pressure and
time specified)IP X8 Protection against immersion under pressure (with
instructions from manufacturer)
The type of protection is defined by two degrees of protection inaccordance with IEC 529:
– Degree of shock-hazard protection and protection againstingress of solid foreign bodies (1st digit)
– Degree of protection against the ingress of water (2nd digit)
For example IP 23:
IP 2 3INGRESS PROTECTION
Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodieshaving a Ø < 12 mm (medium-sized solid bodies),insertion of fingers or objects.
Protection against ingress of water falling at any angle up to 60º fromvertical. There must be no adverse effect (spray water).
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 6
Chapter 9 / 7
Applications for luminaires with increased protection
Damp locations
Bakeries IP X1 The following generally Manure sheds IP X1 applies:Animal-feed preparation facilities IP X1 IP X5: for cleaning using Industrial kitchens IP X1 water jetsBoiler rooms IP X1 IP X4: in rinsing areasCommercial workshops IP 20Granaries IP X1(Deep-freeze) cold storage IP X1Pump houses IP X1Sculleries IP X1Laundries IP X1
Wet locations
Beer or wine cellars IP X4 The following generally Shower cubicles IP X4 applies:Meat processing facilities IP X5 IP X5: for cleaning using Electroplating facilities IP X4 water jetsGreenhouses IP X4Dairies IP X4Workshops using wet processes IP X4Car wash areas IP X4
Agricultural facilities
Beer or wine cellars IP 44 The following generally Shower cubicles IP 44 applies:Stores, storerooms for hay, IP X5: for cleaning using straw, feedstuff IP 44 water jetsIntensive stock farming IP 44 IP 54+FF: when increased Animal sheds IP 44 fire riskAdjoining rooms of animal sheds IP 44
Facilities with increased fire risk
Workrooms IP 50Woodworking IP 50Sawmills IP 50Paper processing IP 50Textile processing IP 50Treatment and fabrication IP 50
Gymnasia and sports halls
Badminton courts IP 20 ballproof luminairesSquash courts IP 20 ballproof luminaires with Indoor tennis courts IP 20 all-round cover; maximumGymnasia and sports halls IP 20 mesh size 60 mm
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 7
8 / Chapter 9
Fire protection
Luminaire identification markingThe following criteria must be taken into account:– Position of normal use– Fire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces– Minimum clearance from combustible substances and materials
Luminaires with thecmarkLuminaires which carry thecmark must be constructed so that the temperature on the mounting surface does not exceed130 °C during abnormal operation, and does not exceed 180 °Cin the event of a ballast fault. Luminaires with this mark aresuitable for direct mounting on parts of buildings made of non-combustible, flame-retardant or normally flammable buildingmaterials according to DIN 4102.
Luminaires with the d/UmarkBoth marks regulate the surface temperatures of luminaires.External surfaces on which readily flammable substances suchas dust or fibrous materials may accumulate when luminairesare installed as prescribed must not exceed specific tempera-tures. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999.A validity transition period allows the d mark to be used until01. 08. 2005. TheUmark introduced in EN 60598 has appliedsince 01.08.1998. The d mark limits the temperature onhorizontal surfaces to 95 °C during normal operation and 115 °Cin the event of a ballast fault. Temperatures must not exceed220 °C on vertical surfaces. In order to fulfil the criteria oftheUmark, the surface temperature on horizontal surfacesmust not exceed 90 °C. The maximum temperature in the eventof a fault is 115 °C, the same as for the d mark. The tempera-ture must not exceed 150 °C on vertical surfaces.
Luminaires with theQmarkLuminaires which carry theQmark are intended for installationin furniture. They are designed so that in the event of a ballastfault, flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as speci-fied in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited, e.g. in corners of woodenfurniture. The materials may be painted, veneered or varnished.
Luminaires with the q markLuminaires which carry the q mark are intended for mountingin or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is notknown. They are designed so that in normal operation anymounting surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do notexceed a temperature of 95 °C.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 8
Fire protection: Place of use – Mark – Requirements
Chapter 9 / 9The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 9
10 / Chapter 9
No material is resistant toall chemical influences.
The effects of chemicals varywidely and take up entirevolumes of resistance tables.The table on the opposite pagecan therefore only give a briefoverview of effects of somefrequently occurring chemicalsand is subject to the followingconditions:
– The chemical substancelisted in the table is a basicmaterial and not part of achemical compound.
– The ambient temperature is 22 °C.
A great many complaints couldbe avoided if due consider-ation were given during theplanning stage to the situationin which the luminaire is goingto be used.
What are the key factors?
1. Luminaire materials
A luminaire consists of severalparts having different functionsand which are therefore madefrom different materials (baseplate, cover, seal, closures,cable inlets, etc.).
2. Applications
The following applications arejust a few examples of situ-ations in which materialdamage may occur:
– Chemical and petro-chemical industry
– Foodstuffs industry (cheeseproduction, dairies, meatprocessing, breweries)
– Agriculture– Fishing industry– Kitchens and industrial
cooking facilities– Car wash facilities– Production facilities and
workshops using a highlevel of oil and grease
3. Chemical composition
The chemical compositionshould be discussed withevery operator.
4. Degree of saturation ofchemical substances
5. Ambient temperature
Depending on the type andcomposition of the substances,chemical reactions will takeplace over a range of tempera-tures. We should be glad toprovide further advice if youhave any questions or doubtsabout the resistance of anymaterials.
Chemical effects on materials
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 10
Chapter 9 / 11
Chemical sub- Stainless Alu- Poly- Polymeth- Poly-stance in question steel minium ester acrylate..carbonate
Acetic acid up to 5 % • • • • •Acetic acid up to 30 % • – • – •Acetone • • – – –Alcohol up to 30 % • • • • •Alcohol, concentrated • • • – –
Aliphatichydrocarbons • • • • •
Ammonia 25 % • • – • –Aniline • • – – –
Aromatichydrocarbons • • • – –
Battery acid • • • • •Beer • • • • •Benzene • • – – –Blood • • • • •Bromic acid • – – – –Carbon dioxide • • • • •Carbon monoxide • • • • •Carbon tetrachloride • • • – –Caustic soda solution 2 % • – • • –Caustic soda solution 10 % • – – • –Chloroform • • – – –Chlorophenol • • – – –Diesel oil, crude oil • • • • •Dioxan • • • – –Ether • • • – –Ethyl acetate (ester) • • – – –Glycerine • • • • •Glycol • • • • •Glysantin • • • • •Hydrochloric acid
up to 20 % – – • • •above 20 % – • • • •
Hydrogen peroxideup to 40 % • • – – •over 40 % • • – • •
• = resistant, • = resistant to limited extent, – = not resistant
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 11
12 / Chapter 9
Chemical sub- Stainless Alu- Poly- Polymeth- Poly-stance in question steel minium ester acrylate..carbonate
Ketones • • – – –Lime milk • – • • •Lysol • • – – –Methylene chloride • • – – –Methanol • • – – –
Metal salts and theiraqueous solutions • – • • •
Naphtha (cleaner’s naphtha) • • • • •Petrolium ether • • • • •Pyridine • • – – –Phenol • • – – –Nitric acid
up to 10 % • – • • •up to 20 % • – • • •above 20 % • • – – –
Sea water • • • • •Soap-suds • • • • •Soda • – • • •Sodium chloride solution • • • • •Sulphuretted hydrogen • • • • •Sulphuric acid
up to 50 % – – • • •up to 70 % – – • • •above 70 % – – – – –
Sulphurous acid up to 5 % • • • • –
Synthetic detergents • • • • •Turpentine • • • • •Water up to 60 °C • • • • •Xylene • • – – –
• = resistant, • = resistant to limited extent, – = not resistant
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 12
Trip
cha
ract
erist
icRa
ted
curre
nt A
TC 9
/11
WTC
-D 1
3 W
TC-D
18
WTL
+ T
C-L
18 W
TC-L
24
WTC
-D +
T 2
6 W
TL +
TC-
L 36
WTL
58
WTC
9/1
1 W
TC-D
13/
18 W
TC 1
8 W
TC-L
18/
24 W
TC-D
+ -
T 26
WTL
+ T
C-L
36 W
TL 5
8 W
TC-L
24
WTC
-D +
-T
26 W
TL +
TC-
L 18
WTC
+ T
C-L
36 W
TL 5
8 W
Short-circuit protection and loading of circuitsMiniature circuit breakers
Trip characteristic Range
B over 3 ln to 5 lnC over 5 ln to 10 lnD over 10 ln to 20 ln
Maximum number of fluorescent lamps per miniature circuit breaker
Number of fluorescent lamps with conventional or low-loss ballast for different lamp circuits
B 10 62 47 27 30 23 14 71 71 32 32 20 60 54 46 28
16 100 75 43 48 37 23 114 114 51 51 32 96 86 74 46
20 125 94 53 60 46 28 144 144 64 64 41 120 106 92 56
25 156 115 66 75 57 36 179 179 79 79 51 150 132 114 72
C 10 62 47 27 30 23 14 99 99 44 44 27 60 54 46 28
16 100 75 43 48 37 23 159 159 71 71 44 96 86 74 46
20 125 94 53 60 46 28 201 201 89 89 56 120 106 92 56
25 156 115 66 75 57 36 250 250 110 110 71 150 132 114 72
inductive shunt p.f. correction twin-lamp
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for metal halidelamps – Maximum recommended number of electronicballasts per automatic circuit breaker
Electronic ballasts for HIT/HIT-DE/HIE and HIT-CE/HIT-TC-CE/HIT-DE-CE/HIE-CE metal halide lamps,non-dimming (TRIDONIC PCI series):
Chapter 9 / 13
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/20 W HI 24 33 42 48 12 15 19 19
1/35 W HI 16 22 28 32 8 10 13 13
1/70 W HI 10 18 26 30 6 10 13 13
1/150 W HI 7 14 20 20 4 6 7 7
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 13
14 / Chapter 9
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballastsfor fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps – Maximumrecommended number of electronic ballasts per automaticcircuit breaker
Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, non-dimming(TRIDONIC PC T5 PRO series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/14 W T16 46 80 80 140 23 40 40 702/14 W T16 46 80 80 140 23 40 40 703/14 W T16 30 46 50 64 15 23 25 324/14 W T16 30 46 50 64 15 23 25 321/21 W T16 46 80 86 98 23 40 43 492/21 W T16 46 78 80 100 23 39 40 501/28 W T16 44 78 80 90 22 39 40 452/28 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 181/35 W T16 46 80 80 140 23 40 40 702/35 W T16 20 30 30 44 10 15 15 221/24 W T16 46 80 80 140 23 40 40 702/24 W T16 30 50 50 64 15 25 25 321/39 W T16 30 40 50 60 15 20 25 302/39 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 181/54 W T16 30 46 50 80 15 23 25 402/54 W T16 14 20 24 30 7 10 12 151/49 W T16 30 46 50 58 15 23 25 292/49 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 181/80 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18
Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, non-dimming(TRIDONIC PC E011/PC T8 PRO series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/18 W T26 46/46 80/80 104/140 110/140 23/23 40/40 52/70 55/702/18 W T26 30/44 46/80 68/140 84/140 15/22 23/40 34/70 42/703/18 W T26 32/– 46/– 66/– 80/– 16/– 23/– 33/– 40/–4/18 W T26 20/– 30/– 40/– 44/– 10/– 15/– 20/– 22/–1/36 W T26 32/46 48/80 70/140 84/140 16/23 24/40 35/70 42/702/36 W T26 20/20 30/30 40/42 44/44 10/10 15/15 20/21 22/221/58 W T26 32/32 46/46 66/66 80/80 16/16 23/23 33/33 40/402/58 W T26 14/14 20/20 26/26 30/30 7/7 10/10 13/13 15/15
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 14
Chapter 9 / 15
Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, Basicdimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC PCA T5 ECO/PCA T5 EXCELone4all series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/14 W T16 30 50 70 80 15 25 35 402/14 W T16 22 32 44 50 11 16 22 253/14 W T16 16 26 34 42 8 13 17 214/14 W T16 16 24 34 38 8 12 17 191/21 W T16 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 382/21 W T16 22 32 44 50 11 16 22 251/28 W T16 32 50 72 80 16 25 36 402/28 W T16 16 22 30 34 8 11 15 171/35 W T16 32 50 70 80 16 25 35 402/35 W T16 16 22 30 34 8 11 15 171/24 W T16 22 32 44 50 11 16 22 252/24 W T16 22 32 46 52 11 16 23 261/39 W T16 22 32 44 50 11 16 22 252/39 W T16 14 22 28 34 7 11 14 171/54 W T16 22 32 44 50 11 16 22 252/54 W T16 14 22 28 34 7 11 14 171/80 W T16 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, Basicdimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC PCA T8 ECO/PCA T8 EXCELone4all series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/18 W T26 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/18 W T26 20 30 40 46 10 15 20 233/18 W T26 12 18 24 30 6 9 12 154/18 W T26 12 16 24 28 6 8 12 141/30 W T26 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 382/30 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 151/36 W T26 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 382/36 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 151/58 W T26 20 30 40 46 10 15 20 232/58 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 15
16 / Chapter 9
Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps,Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC PCA TCL ECO/PCA TCL EXCEL one4all series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/18 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/18 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 401/24 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/24 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 401/36 W TC-L 80 80 80 100 40 40 40 502/36 W TC-L 20 30 40 40 10 15 20 201/40 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/40 W TC-L 14 20 26 30 7 10 13 151/55 W TC-L 20 30 40 40 10 15 20 202/55 W TC-L 10 14 20 22 5 7 10 111/80 W TC-L 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18
Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps,non-dimming (TRIDONIC PC PRO FSD series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/18 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/18 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 401/24 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/24 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 401/36 W TC-L 80 80 80 100 40 40 40 502/36 W TC-L 20 30 40 40 10 15 20 201/40 W TC-L 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/40 W TC-L 14 20 26 30 7 10 13 151/55 W TC-L 20 30 40 40 10 15 20 202/55 W TC-L 10 14 20 22 5 7 10 111/80 W TC-L 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 16
Chapter 9 / 17
Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescentlamps, non-dimming (TRIDONIC PC PRO series):
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 80 80 80 100 40 40 40 50
2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 80 80 80 100 40 40 40 50
1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 80 80 80 100 40 40 40 50
2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 40
1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 40
2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 32 50 80 80 16 25 40 40
1/32 W TC-TEL 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/32 W TC-TEL 16 22 30 44 8 11 15 221/42 W TC-TEL 30 50 80 80 15 25 40 402/42 W TC-TEL 16 22 30 44 8 11 15 221/57 W TC-TEL 20 30 30 44 10 15 15 22
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B201.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 40 60 80 80 20 30 40 40
2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 28 40 60 64 14 20 30 32
1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 22 32 46 68 11 16 23 34
1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 22 32 46 56 11 16 23 28
1/32 W TC-TEL 26 38 50 58 13 19 25 292/32 W TC-TEL 10 18 24 28 5 9 12 141/42 W TC-TEL 26 38 50 58 13 19 25 292/42 W TC-TEL 10 18 24 28 5 9 12 14
Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescentlamps, Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC PCA ECO/PCA EXCEL one4all series):
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 17
18 / Chapter 9
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for high-pressurelamps – Maximum recommended number of ballasts perautomatic circuit breaker
Conventional ballasts for HIT/HIT-DE/HIE metal halidelamps, uncompensated
Lamp values Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breakerW V A C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B2535 230 0.53 11 18 23 29 9 15 18 2370 230 0.98 7 11 14 17 5 8 9 12
150 230 1.8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 6250 230 3 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4400 230 3.5 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 3
Conventional ballasts for HST/HST-DE/HSE high-pressuresodium vapour lamps, uncompensated
Lamp values Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breakerW V A C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B2550 230 0.77 9 14 18 22 6 10 13 1670 230 1 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 12
100 230 1.2 6 9 11 14 4 6 8 10150 230 1.8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 7250 230 3 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4400 230 4.4 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2
Conventional ballasts for HME high-pressure mercuryvapour lamps, uncompensated
Lamp values Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breakerW V A C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B2550 230 0.6 10 15 18 23 8 13 16 2080 230 0.8 6 9 11 14 6 10 12 15
125 230 1.15 4 6 7 9 4 7 9 10250 230 2.15 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 5400 230 3.25 1 2 3 3 1 2 2 2700 230 5.4 1 1 1 2 – 1 1 1
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 18
Chapter 9 / 19
Conventional ballasts for HIT/HIT-DE/HIE metal halidelamps, compensated
Lamp Com- Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breakervalues pen-W V sation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B2535 230 6 µF 22 36 45 50 11 18 23 2770 230 12 µF 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 20
150 230 20 µF 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 12250 230 32 µF 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 8400 230 35 µF 3 5 7 8 2 4 5 6
Conventional ballasts for HST/HST-DE/HSE high-pressuresodium vapour lamps, compensated
Lamp Com- Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breakervalues pen-W V sation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B2550 230 10 µF 16 24 31 38 11 17 22 2770 230 12 µF 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 20
100 230 12 µF 10 16 20 25 7 11 14 17150 230 20 µF 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 12250 230 36 µF 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 8400 230 45 µF 3 4 5 7 2 3 4 5
Conventional ballasts for HME high-pressure mercuryvapour lamps, compensated
Lamp Com- Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breakervalues pen-W V sation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B2550 230 7 µF 19 31 39 49 10 15 18 2380 230 8 µF 12 19 24 30 6 9 11 14
125 230 10 µF 7 12 15 19 4 6 7 9250 230 18 µF 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 4400 230 25 µF 2 4 5 6 1 2 2 2700 230 40 µF 1 2 2 3 – 1 1 1
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 19
20 / Chapter 9
Power C10 C16 B10 B1620 W 58 93 29 4635 W 41 65 20 3250 W 21 35 10 1770 W 15 24 7 1280 W 14 22 7 11
105 W 8 13 4 6150 W 4 6 2 3210 W 2–3 4–5 1 2300 W 1–2 2–3 n.r. 1
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltagehalogen incandescent lamps – Maximum recommendednumber of transformers per automatic circuit breaker
Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogenincandescent lamps (TRIDONIC TMBx/OMTx series):
Power C10 C16 B10 B1620 W 42 67 21 3335 W 35 56 17 2840 W 26 43 13 2150 W 23 37 11 1860 W 21 33 10 1670 W 16 26 8 1380 W 13 21 6 10
105 W 9 14 4 7
Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogenincandescent lamps (TRIDONIC TMAx/TMDx series):
Power C10 C16 B10 B16250 W 3–4 5–6 1–2 2–3300 W 2 3–4 1 1–2500 W 1 1–2 n.r. n.r.
Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogenincandescent lamps (TRIDONIC OGT series):
n.r. = not recommended
n.r. = not recommended
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 20
Low-voltage installation
Service life and luminous flux
The service life and luminous flux of low-voltage halogen lampsare extremely voltage dependent. Voltage changes on the lineside are transferred to the secondary side in the same ratio.
Operation at rated load
Magnetic transformers should be operated at rated load as far aspossible so as to avoid any rise in the secondary voltage whichcan result in a reduction in lamp service life (5 % overvoltagecorresponds to 30 % shorter life).
Conductor cross-sections and voltage drop
Because the voltages are small, large currents flow on thesecondary side. If conductors are long and have small cross-sections, this can result in considerable voltage drops. Cross-sections must be chosen so that the voltage drop across theconductor between transformer and lamp does not exceed 5 %.
A 1 V overvoltageis insignificant fora 230 W halogenlamp. For a 12 Vhalogen lamp,however, thisrepresents anovervoltage of8 % which re-duces the averageservice life of thehalogen lamp,e.g. from 3,000hours to approx.1,200 hours.
Φ = luminous flux Lh = service life
50
30
20
1086
4
2
1 =100%
0.80.70.60.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.15
7
65
4
3
2
1 =100%0.80.60.40.3
0.2
0.10.080.06
0.040.030.02
Mul
tiplic
atio
n fa
ctor
for r
elat
ive
oper
atin
g va
lues
Voltage as % of nominal voltage
Lh
Lh
Φ
Φ
60 % 80 % 100 % 120 % 140 %
Chapter 9 / 21The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 21
22 / Chapter 9
Trans-formerrating
Trans-former
Required conductor cross-sections in mm2 as a function oftransformer rating and cable length (one-way line length) formagnetic transformers:
Cable length in m
up to 2 m up to 4 m up to 6 m up to 8 m up to 10 m up to 12 m20 VA 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.550 VA 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 41OO VA 1.5 2.5 4 4 6 6150 VA 2.5 4 6 6 10 10200 VA 4 4 6 10 10 16
Installation
The distance between transformer and lamps must be as shortas possible (minimum distance, however, is approx. 30 cm) inorder to avoid the relatively large conductor cross-sections.On the other hand, there is often unwanted humming, especiallywhen lighting is adjusted; therefore the transformer must beinstalled out of earshot if possible.
Wherever possible, cables must be laid in a star configuration and be of equal length to ensure that all lamps receive the samevoltage.
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 22
Transformers and light regulation
Only approved safety transformers should be used. The ambienttemperature must not exceed 50 °C max. Please note that trans-formers for use in areas which present fire risks must carry theappropriate conformity mark (e.g. , , , ).
Phase control
Halogen lamps are operated with a magnetic transformer.
Reverse phase control
Halogen lamps are operated with an electronic transformer in the high-frequency range. Important: do not exceed maximumconductor length.
Safety measures when operating low-voltage halogen lamps
Low-voltage halogen lamps generate a huge amount of heat.In the case of recessed luminaires, make sure there is adequateheat removal and that the safety distances from combustiblematerials are observed.The necessary safety distances from the illuminated surface also apply when using spotlights. These are identified by thefollowing symbol and details of the relevant distance in metres:
Chapter 9 / 23
… m
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
09_ELEKTROTECH_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 9:51 Uhr Seite 23
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:21 Uhr Seite 2
Personal Notes
Chapter 10The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
10_NOTIZEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:51 Uhr Seite 1
Personal Notes
Chapter 10 The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
10_NOTIZEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:51 Uhr Seite 2
Chapter 10
Personal Notes
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
10_NOTIZEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:51 Uhr Seite 3
Personal Notes
Chapter 10 The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
10_NOTIZEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:51 Uhr Seite 4
Chapter 10
Personal Notes
The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
10_NOTIZEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:51 Uhr Seite 5
Personal Notes
Chapter 10 The
Ligh
ting
Hand
book
10_NOTIZEN_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:51 Uhr Seite 6
Norway
Zumtobel Staff Belysning AS
Industriveien 11
1481 Hagan
Tel: +47/(0)670/62230
Fax: +47/(0)670/62269
Email: [email protected]
Sweden
Zumtobel Staff AB
Norr Mälarstrand 8
11220 Stockholm
Tel: +46/(0)8/6511480
Fax: +46/(0)8/265605
E-mail: [email protected]
Head offices
Zumtobel Staff GmbH
Schweizer Strasse 30
Postfach 72
A-6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA
Tel. +43/(0)5572/390-0
Fax +43/(0)5572/22 826
Zumtobel Staff GmbH & Co. KG
Grevenmarschstr. 74-78
D-32657 Lemgo, GERMANY
Tel. +49/(0)5261/2 12-0
Fax +49/(0)5261/2 12-7777
www.zumtobelstaff.de
www.zumtobelstaff.com
Art.-No. 04 797 525-UK 07/04 © Zumtobel StaffTechnical data was correct at time of going to press.We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice.Please contact your local sales office for further information.Printed on environmentally-friendly chlorine-free paper.
United Kingdom
Zumtobel Staff Lighting Ltd.
Unit 4 - The Argent Centre,
Pump Lane
Hayes/Middlesex UB3 3BL
Tel. +44/(0)20 8589 1800
Fax +44/(0)20 8756 4800
Email: [email protected]
www.zumtobelstaff.co.uk
USA and Canada
Zumtobel Staff Lighting
3300 Route 9W
Highland, New York 1258-2630
Tel. +1/(0)845/691 62 62
Fax +1/(0)845/691 62 89
www.zumtobelstaff.us
Australia and New Zealand
Zumtobel Staff (Australia) Pty. Ltd.
2 Wella Way
Somersby, NSW 2250
Tel. +61/(2)4340 3200
Fax +61/(2)4340 2108
Email: [email protected]
www.zumtobelstaff.com.au
00_INHALTSVER_uk.qxd 24.06.2004 10:10 Uhr Seite 2